0% found this document useful (0 votes)

20 views188 pages

Classical Foundations 201 Book-1-1

Uploaded by

snorteland.gwen

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

20 views188 pages

Classical Foundations 201 Book-1-1

Uploaded by

snorteland.gwen

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 188

‫ّالعربيّةّالكالسيكيّة‬

Classical Arabic

Classical Foundations
201

‫ف‬
ّ ‫كتابّالصر‬
Morphology Textbook

‫املؤلّفّ|ّفرازحسنّمالكّ ّوسيّدّحممّدّعمري‬
By: Faraz Hasan Malik and Syed M. Omair

1
Copyright © 2014 Qasid Arabic Institute | ‫الطبعةّالعاشرة‬ | First Edition
Classical Arabic
Classical Foudations 201
Morphology Textbook

First Edition

Published by Qasid Arabic Institute

Amman . Jordan
[email protected]

Copyright © 2014. Qasid Arabic Institute

All rights reserved. No part of this content may be reproduced or transmitted

in any form or by any means, electronic, optical, or mechanical, including
photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and
retrieval system, without permission in writing from Qasid Arabic Institute.

Printed and bound in the Hashemite Kingdom of Jordan.

2
‫رب العاملي‬
‫امحلد هلل العلمي احلكمي ّ‬
‫السالم عىل يس ّّدان محمّد رساج عمل هللا الـمبي‬ ‫الصالة و ّ‬
‫و ّ‬
‫و عىل آهل و حصبه و التابعي هلم اىل يوم ادلّ ين‬
‫آهل الـمعرفة و العمل و احلمكة و اليقي‬

‫نويت التّ ّعمل و التّعلمي و التّذكّر و التّذكري و النّفع و الانتفاع‬

‫مسك بكتاب هللا و س نّة رسوهل‬ ‫و الفادة و الاس تفادة و ّ‬
‫احلث عىل التّ ّ‬
‫و ادلّ عـا اىل الهدى و ادلّ لةل عىل اخلري‬
‫ابتغاء وجه هللا و مرضاته و قربه و ثوابه س بحانه و تعاىل‬

‫و بعد‬

‫‪3‬‬
CONTENTS
CHAPTER ONE.................................................................................................................................................... 7
SECTION 1.1 | INTRODUCTION TO ARABIC SPEECH AND ITS PARTS............................................................... 8
SECTION 1.2 | THE SIGNS OF AN'ISM ّ‫عَ َالماتّاِ ْسم‬........................................................................................................ 9
EXERCISE 1.1 | IDENTIFYING 'ISMS ........................................................................................................................ 13
SECTION 1.3 | PARTICLES ‫ حروف‬............................................................................................................................... 14
EXERCISE 1.2 | IDENTIFYING ‫ الأفْعال‬AND ‫ الحروف‬................................................................................................ 17
EXERCISE 1.3| IDENTIFYING PARTS OF SPEECH ................................................................................................ 18
READING COMPREHENSION #1 | PROPHET IBRAHIM ..................................................................................... 19
TRANSLATION #1 | PROPHET IBRAHIM ................................................................................................................ 20
APPLY #1 | PARTS OF SPEECH IN SŪRA YUSUF ................................................................................................... 23
MASTERY EXERCISE #1| ANALYZING SŪRA AL-MARYAM .............................................................................. 24
CHAPTER TWO ............................................................................................................................................... 29
READING 2.1 | INTRODUCTION TO VERBS........................................................................................................... 30
READING 2.2 | THE SIX ABWĀB ............................................................................................................................... 31
EXERCISE 2.1 | SIX ABWĀB ........................................................................................................................................ 32
EXERCISE 2.2 | PAST TENSE ...................................................................................................................................... 33
READING 2.3| FORMING THE COMMAND ............................................................................................................ 35
READING 2.4 | ‫ الهمزة‬..................................................................................................................................................... 37
EXERCISE 2.3| COMMAND TENSE AND ‫ الهمزة‬...................................................................................................... 38
EXERCISE 2.4 | VERB CONJUGATIONS AND COMMANDS ................................................................................ 39
READING COMPREHENSION #2 | PROPHET IBRAHIM ..................................................................................... 42
TRANSLATION #2 | PROPHET IBRAHIM ................................................................................................................ 44
APPLY #2 | IDENTIFYING VERBS AND THEIR BAB ............................................................................................ 47
APPLY #3 | IDENTIFY COMMANDS IN SŪRA ‫ طه‬.................................................................................................. 50
MASTERY EXERCISE #2 | ANALYZING SŪRA NUH ............................................................................................ 52
CHAPTER THREE ........................................................................................................................................... 56
READING 3.1 | THE TEN FORMS.............................................................................................................................. 57
EXERCISE 3.1 | FORMS 1 AND 2 ................................................................................................................................ 62
EXERCISE 3.2 | FORMS 3 AND 4 ................................................................................................................................ 63
EXERCISE 3.3 | FORMS 5 AND 6 ................................................................................................................................ 64
EXERCISE 3.4 | FORMS 7 AND 8 ................................................................................................................................ 65
EXERCISE 3.5 | FORMS 9 AND 10.............................................................................................................................. 66
EXERCISE 3.6 | THE TEN FORMS ............................................................................................................................. 67
READING COMPREHENSION #3 | PROPHET IBRAHIM ..................................................................................... 69
TRANSLATION #3 | PROPHET IBRAHIM ................................................................................................................ 71
APPLY #4 | IDENTIFYING VERBS AND THEIR BAB ............................................................................................ 74
APPLY #5 | THE TEN FORMS IN AHĀDITH .......................................................................................................... 76
MASTERY #3 | DUA ..................................................................................................................................................... 78
CHAPTER FOUR .............................................................................................................................................. 79
READING 4.1 | HANS WEHR SAMPLE ENTRY ...................................................................................................... 80
EXERCISE 4.1 | HANS WEHR ..................................................................................................................................... 82
READING 4.2| PRONOUNS ......................................................................................................................................... 84
EXERCISE 4.2| PRONOUNS ACTIVITY..................................................................................................................... 85
EXERCISE 4.3 | HANS WEHR EXERCISE ................................................................................................................ 86
EXERCISE 4.4| PRONOUNS ACTIVITY..................................................................................................................... 89
READING COMPREHENSION #4 | PROPHET IBRAHIM ..................................................................................... 90
TRANSLATION #4 | PROPHET IBRAHIM ................................................................................................................ 91
APPLY #6 | HANS WEHR AND PRONOUN IN PROPHET IBRAHIM ................................................................. 94

4
APPLY #7 | HANS WEHR AND TEN FORMS EXERCISE ..................................................................................... 94
MASTERY EXERCISE #4 | ANALYZING SŪRA ASH-SHU'ARA' .......................................................................... 96
CHAPTER FIVE ................................................................................................................................................ 99
READING 5.1 | THE STATES OF ‫ اإلعراب‬................................................................................................................ 100
READING 5.2 | THE SIGNS OF ‫ اإلعراب‬FOR ‘ISMS............................................................................................... 102
EXERCISE 5.1 | PRATICE WITH SIGNS OF ‫ اإلعراب‬FOR ‘ISMS .......................................................................... 107
READING 5.3 | IMPLICIT SIGNS OF ‫ اإلعراب‬FOR ‫السـماء‬.................................................................................... 109
EXERCISE 5.2 | IMPLICIT DECLENSION ............................................................................................................... 111
EXERCISE 5.3 | PRACTICE WITH IMPLICIT SIGNS OF ‫ اإلعراب‬......................................................................... 112
READING COMPREHENSION #5 | PROPHET IBRAHIM ................................................................................... 113
TRANSLATION #5 | PROPHET IBRAHIM .............................................................................................................. 114
APPLY #8 | ON THE SIGNS OF ‫ اإلعراب‬FOR ‘ISMS.............................................................................................. 116
APPLY #9 | ON THE IMPLICIT SIGNS OF ‫ اإلعراب‬............................................................................................... 118
MASTERY EXERCISE #5 | ANALYZING SŪRA AL-JUMU`AH .......................................................................... 119
CHAPTER SIX ................................................................................................................................................. 123
READING 6.1 | SIGNS OF ‫ اإلعراب‬FOR ‫الفعال المضارعة‬....................................................................................... 124
EXERCISE 6.1 | PRACTICE WITH ‫ إعراب‬OF ‫ الفعل المضارع‬................................................................................... 126
EXERCISE 6.2 | SIGNS OF ‘IRAAB FOR PRESENT TENSE VERBS.................................................................... 127
TRANSLATION #6 | PROPHET IBRAHIM .............................................................................................................. 129
APPLY #10 | IDENTIFYING VERBS AND THEIR BAB ........................................................................................ 131
APPLY #11 | ON THE ‫ إعراب‬OF THE ‫ فعل مضارع‬THROUGH THE QUR'AN................................................... 132
MASTERY EXERCISE #6 | ANALYZING SŪRA AL-JATHIYAH ......................................................................... 134
CHAPTER SEVEN .......................................................................................................................................... 142
READING 7.1 | ‘ISMS WHICH DO NOT HAVE ‫ اإلعراب‬......................................................................................... 143
EXERCISE 7.1 | FIXED WORDS AND THEIR ‫ محل‬................................................................................................ 147
EXERCISE 7.2 | ‫ مبني‬WORDS..................................................................................................................................... 149
READING COMPREHENSION #7 | PROPHET IBRAHIM ................................................................................... 150
TRANSLATION #7 | PROPHET IBRAHIM .............................................................................................................. 151
APPLY #12 | IDENTIFYING ‫ مبني‬ISMS PROPHET IBRAHIM.............................................................................. 153
APPLY #13 | FIXED ISMS THROUGH THE QUR'AN ........................................................................................... 154
MASTERY EXERCISE # 7| ANALYZING HADITH .............................................................................................. 156
CHAPTER EIGHT .......................................................................................................................................... 158
READING 8.1 | IMPACTORS OF ‫ الجزم‬WHICH AFFECT ‫ فعل الـمضارع‬................................................................ 159
EXERCISE 8.1 | UNDERSTANDING THE IMPACTORS OF ‫جزم‬.......................................................................... 162
EXERCISE 8.2 | PRACTICE WITH THE IMPACTORS OF ‫ جزم‬.............................................................................. 163
TRANSLATION #8 | PROPHET IBRAHIM .............................................................................................................. 165
APPLY #14 | HADITH ON PARTICLES OF ‫ جزم‬..................................................................................................... 167
MASTERY #8 | PARTICLES OF ‫ جزم‬IN SŪRA YŪSUF........................................................................................... 169
CHAPTER NINE ............................................................................................................................................. 171
READING 9.1| PARTICLES OF ‫ نصب‬WHICH AFFECT THE ‫ الفعل الـمضارع‬....................................................... 172
EXERCISE 9.1 | ‫ النواصب‬.............................................................................................................................................. 174
EXERCISE 9.2 | EXERCISE ON THE PARTICLES OF ‫نصب‬.................................................................................. 175
EXERCISE 9.3 | EXERCISE ON PARTICLES OF ‫ نصب‬........................................................................................... 176
TRANSLATION #9 | PROPHET IBRAHIM .............................................................................................................. 179
APPLY #15 | EXERCISE WITH HADITH ON PARTICLES OF ‫نصب‬.................................................................... 181
APPLY #16 | ANALYZING SŪRA AL-KAHF .......................................................................................................... 183
MASTERY #9 | PARTICLES OF ‫ نصب‬IN SŪRA YŪSUF........................................................................................ 186

5
Introduction
What is Classical Arabic?

Classical Arabic is the name given to that branch of Arabic which is based on three primary
sources: the Qur’an, the poetry of the Arabs before Islam, and the speech of one who had
mastery of the Arabic language before the year 150 in the Hijri calendar.

It is a language of extraordinary vastness, beauty, and of things which other languages have
forgotten such as declension and duals. It is the oldest of the Semitic languages according to
comparative linguistics, and it owes its preservation to the Arabian Peninsula itself which
afforded the Arabs isolation and sanctuary even as other empires rose and fell in Asia and
Europe.

The present book is an attempt to capture, at a basic level, the grammatical structures which are
present in Classical Arabic. It is roughly based on the text al-Muqaddama al- Ajrūmīyya, a famous
introductory grammar primer over 500 years old which is still taught throughout the Arab lands.
The present book covers two main topics: Arabic syntax, meaning sentence structure, and Arabic
morphology, or the formation and patterns of words.

6
CHAPTER ONE
Defining Speech

Overview
Since this is the first chapter so it is important as a student to understand the study methodology
along with the course as the same format will be used within each module.

The course is structured into three parts: preparation, proficiency, and mastery.

Preparation and proficiency are both required while the mastery section is only highly
recommended to finish. Within the preparation section we introduce you to the parts of Arabic
speech. After completing the required readings and videos you will be given exercises within
‫ القصصّالنبيني‬and other texts such as the Qur'an and hadith to ensure understanding. After
completing all the required parts you will be asked to do a reading comprehension exercise
within ‫ القصصّالنبيني‬along with enrichment exercises from Sūra Yusuf and other hadiths. Lastly,
in order to obtain the level of mastery attempt to complete the exercise of selected verses from
Sūra Maryam.

If you are able to complete all of this not only will you have mastered the parts of Arabic speech
but you will also have added a wealth of knowledge from the stories of Prophet Ibrahim,
Prophet Yusuf, and Maryam!

7
Reading 1.1 | Introduction to Arabic Speech and its Parts

The following are the very first lines of al-Muqaddama al-Ajrūmīyya which give a basic definition
of Arabic speech and its parts, as well as how to identify them.
ّ
)‫ومّ(نَ َف َعّهللاُّبِِه َّوّبِ ُك ْم‬َ ‫ّآج ُّر‬
ُ ‫الّابْ ُن‬ َ َ‫ق‬
َّ ‫ّجاءَّلِ َم ْع‬ ِ ِ
‫ن‬ َ ‫ف‬ٌ ‫ّوّح ْر‬
َ ‫ض ِع َّوّأَقْ َس ُامهُّثََالثَةٌّا ْس ٌم َّوّف ْع ٌل‬ ُ ‫بّال ُم ِف‬
ْ ‫يدّ ِِب َلو‬ ُ ‫ّه َوّاللَّ ْف‬
ُ ‫ظّال ُمَرَّك‬ ُ ُ‫ال َك َالم‬
Ibn Ajrūmu (may Allah benefit him and you all) said:
Speech must have utterance; it must be structured and it must be meaningful in its suntactical
placement. It consists of only three parts: the noun, the verb and the particle has a meaning
attached.

Words with an intrinsic meaning Speech

ّ ُّ‫ال َك َالم‬
ّ ّ‫اِ ْس ٌم‬
but are not connected to a tense Utterance
ّ ‫ظ‬ ُّ ‫اللَّ ْف‬
Words with an intrinsic meaning Structure
ّ ‫ب‬ُّ ‫ال ُمَرَّك‬
ّ ّ‫فِ ْع ٌل‬
but are always connected to a tense Meaningful
ّ ‫يد‬ُّ ‫ال ُم ِف‬
ْ ‫ِِب َلو‬
Words without an intrinsic meaning Placement
ّ ّ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫َح ْر‬ ّ ‫ض ِّع‬

8
ّ

READING 1.2 | THE SIGNS OF AN'ISM ‫َع ََلمات اِ ْسم‬

In the Arabic language an 'ism is a noun. It is a word that has an intrinsic meaning but is not
connected to a tense. Just as there are many ways to identify nouns in the English language there
are also many ways to identify 'isms within the Arabic language.

‫| التَّ نْ ِوين‬ One of the signs of a noun is that it has ‫ التَّ نْ ِوين‬at the end of the word. ‫ التَّ نْ ِوين‬literally
means 'nunnation' (adding the sound of a ‫ن‬
ّْ to the end of the word).
For example: ‫ قَلَ ٌّم‬can be pronounced as ‫ن‬
ّْ ‫قَلَ ُم‬. Or ٌ‫ َش َجرّة‬can be pronounced ‫ َش َجرتُ ّْن‬.
َ َ
There are three types of ‫ التَّ نْ ِوين‬: ٌٌٌٌّ
It is important to understand that every word with ‫التَّ ْن ِوين‬ is an 'ism but not every 'ism

must have ‫التَّ ْن ِوين‬.

‫الَلم‬ ِ ِ‫| ُد ُخول األَل‬

َّ ‫ف َو‬ An 'alif laam (‫ )ال‬to a word indicates that it is an ism. In addition, it also

ّ‫تاب‬ ِ
indicates definiteness of a word. For example: ُ ‫ الك‬would be translated as 'the book'. Without
ٌّ ِ‫ ك‬would be translated as 'a book'. Both are considered 'isms since they each have a sign
the (‫تاب)ال‬
of an 'ism.

Not every 'ism will have an 'alif laam but every word that does or is able to take an alif
laam is considered to be an 'ism.

ّ
)‫ – ة | التَاءُ ال َم ْربُوطَةُ (ة‬This is a letter in the Arabic language which generally indicates femininity.
It literally means to connect hence indicating its shape.
For example: ‫جرة‬
َ ‫ َش‬, ‫ ََهَْزة‬, ‫َمكْتَ بَّة‬
َ

‫اف‬
َ ‫ض‬َ ‫يب ا ِإل‬ِ
ُ ‫ | تَ ْرك‬The idafa construction is the relationship between two or more 'isms. It usually
indicates some type of possession. It literally means 'addition'. There are two parts to the idafa
construction: the ‫ ُمضاف‬and the ‫ ُمضافّإلَيّه‬. The ‫ ُمضاف‬is the possessor while the ‫ ُمضافّإليه‬is the
thing being possessed. There are a few conditions for each part.

9
‫ ُمضاف‬:
1. It must always be definite (but it does not have to have ‫)ال‬
2. It may end in any vowel
3. It can never end in ‫التَّ نْ ِوين‬

*This occurs because while the ‫ ُمضاف‬is indefinite outwardly, it takes the meaning
of a definite word inwardly.

‫ ُمضافّإلَيه‬:
1. It may be definite or indefinite
ِّ or ٌّ
2. It must end with ٌ

*In some cases it can act as the ‫ ُمضاف‬to another ‫إلَيه‬ ‫ ُمضاف‬while still being a
‫ُمضاف إلَيه‬
ِ‫ّهللا‬
ّ ‫ت‬ ُ ‫ |ّبَْي‬The house of Allah
ّ ّ‫تابّولِد‬ ِ
ُ ‫ |ّّك‬The book of a boy
ّ‫ك‬ ِّ ِ‫ّع ِمّاملل‬ ‫بن‬ِ‫ |ّا‬The son of the uncle of the king (The king's cousin)
َ َ ُ
ِ
ّ ‫دة‬ِ ِ
ّ ‫ |غُالمُّهذهّالوال‬The boy of this mother ('this' would be considered the mudaf ilaih)
ّ
ِ ‫ود ح‬
‫رف اجل ِِّر قَ ْب لَه‬ ُ Any word that comes after ‫ َحرف اجل ِّر‬is an 'ism. Below is a list:
َ ُ ‫|و ُج‬

‫ُحروف اجل ِِّر‬ Examples

‫(ّ ِم ّن‬from) ّ ‫اق‬ ِّ ‫ُه َو ِّم ْنّال ٌّْ ِعَر‬

ّ ِ‫(ّإ‬to)
‫ىل‬ ِّ ‫ىلّالس‬
‫وق‬ ُّ ِ‫بّزي ٌدّإ‬ َ ‫َذ َه‬
‫(ّ َع ّن‬on) ‫َّح ِّو‬
ْ ‫ّع ْنّالن‬ َ ‫أت‬ُ ‫قر‬
ّ ‫(ّ َعلَ ّى‬on) ‫ّعلَىّالطَّا ِولَِّة‬ َ ‫اب‬
ِ
ُ َ‫الكت‬
ّ ِّ(in)
‫يف‬ ‫زي ٌدّيفّالدَّا ِّر‬
ِّ ّ(with)
‫ب‬ ّ‫تّبَِزيد‬
ُ ‫َمَرْر‬
‫(ّ َّك‬like) ّ‫َس ِد‬
َ ‫زي ٌدّ َكاأل‬
ّ ‫(ّ ِّل‬to/with) ّ ِ‫ابّلِطَال‬
‫ب‬ ِ
ُ َ‫الكت‬

10
‫َْساء بِ ُدون اإل ْع َراب‬
ْ ‫|األ‬These are words which do not contain any of the signs but are still
considered to be 'isms. As for now familiarize yourself with these words as nouns and their
meanings. Understand that the signs of 'isms do not apply to these words.

‫ | الضمائر‬These are the pronouns in Arabic.

Attached Form
Detached
(to Verbs and Meanings
Form
Nouns)
When this
‫ّْي‬ ّ‫أَ َن‬ “I”

Person
is attached

First
to a verb
an extra ‫نَا‬ ‫ََْن ُّن‬ “We” (dual or
plu.)
nun is
added َّ
‫ك‬ َّ ْ‫أَن‬
‫ت‬ “You” (masc.
sing.)
before the
ya’. ‫ُك َمّا‬ ّ‫أَنْتُ َما‬ “You” (masc.
dual)

Second Person
‫ُك ّْم‬ ّ‫أَنْتُ ْم‬ “You” (masc.
plu.)

ِّ
‫ك‬ ِّ ْ‫أَن‬
‫ت‬ “You” (fem.
sing.)

‫ُك َمّا‬ ّ‫أَنْتُ َما‬ “You” (fem. dual)

‫ُك َّّن‬ ّ‫ت‬

َّ ُ ْ‫أَن‬ “You” (fem. plu.)

ُ‫ّه‬ ‫ُه َّو‬ “He” (masc.

sing.)

‫ُه َما‬ ‫َُهَا‬ “They” (masc.

dual)
Third Person

ّ‫ُه ْم‬ ‫ُه ّْم‬ “They” (masc.

plu.)

‫َها‬ ‫ِه َّي‬ “She” (fem. sing.)

‫ُه َما‬ ‫َُهَا‬ “They” (fem.

dual)

ّ‫ُه َّن‬ ‫ُه َّّن‬ “They” (fem.

plu.)

11
‫ | االسمّاإلشارة‬These are called demonstrative pronouns in English. These are words which refer
or point to something, like ‫ هذا‬or ‫ك‬
ّ ‫ذل‬, meaning ‘this’ or ‘that’, and they have a distinct “near” and
“far” form.

Far Near
Female Male Female Male

َ ِ‫ذّل‬ ِ‫هّ ِذّه‬

َ ‫تِْل‬
ّ‫ك‬ ّ‫ك‬ ‫هّ َذّا‬ Singular

َّ ِ‫كّ|ّتَين‬
‫ك‬ َ ِ‫ََتن‬ َّ ِ‫كّ ّ|ّ َذين‬
‫ك‬ َ ِ‫َذان‬ ِ َ‫هّت‬
ِّ َ‫انّ|ّهّت‬
‫ني‬ ‫هّ َذ ِانّ ّ|ّهّذي ّن‬ Dual

َ ِ‫أُولَئ‬
ّ‫ك‬ ّ‫هّ ُؤَال ِء‬ Plural

‫ | اسمّال موصول‬These are called relative pronouns in English. These words require having a full

sentence or a prepositional phrase after them, which is called the ‫مجلةّالصلة‬. To illustrate, the
sentence ‫ جاءّالذي‬by itself means ‘He came the one who….’ and this is incomplete because it

doesn’t explain who the person or thing is. However, a sentence like ‫ جاءّالذيّمنّأمريكا‬meaning

‘Came the one who is from America’ has a ‫ الصلة‬afterwards and thus makes sense.

Female Male

ّ َِّ‫ال‬
‫ت‬ ‫الَّ ِذي‬ Singular

ِ َ‫اللَّت‬
ِّ َ‫انّ|ّاللَّت‬
‫ني‬ ‫اللَّ َذ ِانّ|ّاللَّ َذي ِّن‬ Dual

ّ ِ‫الالئِيّ|ّاللََّو‬
‫اِت‬ َّ ّ|ّ ّ‫الالِِت‬
َّ َّ ‫الَّ ِذ‬
‫ين‬ Plural

‫ اسمّاالستفهام‬and ‫ط‬
ّ ‫ | اسمّالشر‬These ‘isms are used to ask questions in Arabic. As they are ‘isms
they can take grammatical roles such as the ‫ مبتدأ‬or ‫ب‬
ّ ‫ خ‬in a sentence. The only difference
between the ‫ اسمّاالستفهام‬and the ‫ط‬
ّ ‫ اسمّالشر‬is that the latter occur in a spefic sentence structure
called ‫ط‬
ّ ‫ ;الشر‬otherwise both of these types of ‘isms are identical.

Who When Where What How

ّ‫َم ْن‬ ّ‫َم َت‬ ّ‫َين‬

َ‫أ‬ ‫َما‬ ّ‫يف‬
َ ‫َك‬

12
Exercise 1.1 | Identifying 'Isms
Instructions | Read Sections 1 and 2 of Prophet Ibrahim. Then Complete the following table
on identifying the 'isms and the appropriate sign of the 'ism. If the 'ism does not have a particular
sign then write the down the appropriate group which that 'ism belongs to. The first example has
already been done for you. If a word repeats twice, you don't have to write it.

ّ ّ
Sign / Category ‫األْساء‬ Sign / Category ‫األْساء‬
ّ ّ ّ ‫ُمضاف‬ ّ ّ‫قبل‬
َ
ّ
ّ ّ ّ ‫ّ ُمضافّإلَيّه‬/‫التَّ نْوين‬ ّ ّ‫أّيم‬
ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ
ّ ّ

13
Reading 1.3 | Particles ‫حروف‬
In the Arabic language ‫ حروف‬are particles. They are words that have no intrinsic meaning attached
to it. In other words, by themselves they don't have a meaning but with other words they provide a
meaning such as 'from' or 'on'. In the al-Muqaddama al-Ajrūmīyya the author states ّ‫فّ َجاءَّ لِ َّم ْع َن‬
ٌ ‫ َحْر‬.
The reason why he says this instead of just ّ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ َحْر‬is to distinguish particles from letters due to the
fact that letters are also called ‫ف‬
ٌّ ‫ َحْر‬in Arabic. Thus he writes the ‫ف‬ ٌّ ‫ َحْر‬that come with meaning (i.e.
particles). There are four categories of ‫حروف‬:

‫اجلَِّر‬/‫ | ُح ُروف اخلَفض‬These are the particles by which the ‫األْساء‬

ْ always proceed after. In addition
they cause the ‫األْساء‬
ْ to be in a state of ّ‫ جر‬hence their name ّ‫حروفّ اجلَر‬.
ُ Below is a list of the ّ‫ُحروف‬
ُ ُ
ّ‫اجلَر‬:

‫زي ٌدّيفّالدَّا ِّر‬ In ّ‫ِيف‬ ّ‫ُه َو ِّم ْنّال ٌّْ ِعَر ِاق‬ From ‫ِمن‬
ّ‫بّزي ٌدّإِىل‬ َ ‫ذَ َه‬
ّ‫تّبَِزيد‬
ُ ‫َمَّرْر‬ ِ
ّ‫ب‬ ‫إِىل‬
ِّ ‫الس‬
With/ By To
‫وق‬ ُّ
ّ‫َس ِد‬
َ ‫زي ٌدّ َكاأل‬ Like ّ‫َك‬ ‫َّح ِّو‬
ْ ‫ّع ْنّالن‬ َ ‫أت‬
ُ ‫قر‬ On/About ‫َع ّن‬
ّ‫ّعلَى‬ ِ
ّ ِ‫ابّلِطَال‬
ّ ‫ب‬ ِ ّ ‫ِّل‬ َ ‫اب‬ ُ َ‫الكت‬
ُ َ‫الكت‬ With/ Belongs
‫الطَّا ِولَِّة‬
On top of ‫َعلَ ّى‬

‫| ُح ُروف ال َقسم‬These are particles used with oaths. While these particles have different meanings in
other contexts they almost always come before ‫ *هللا‬giving the meaning of 'By Allah!'

ِّ‫َوهللا‬ ّ‫َو‬
ِّ‫ب ٌِّهللا‬ ِّ
‫ب‬
ِ‫لل‬
ّ ‫ََت‬ ّ‫ت‬ **
َ
* The word ‫ هللا‬will be in the state of ‫جر‬
ّ
** Only used within the Qu'ran

14
‫| ُح ُروف األَفْعال‬These are the particles that are used only with verbs as discussed in the verbs
section of the book.

‫بّإىلّامل ْد َر َسِّة‬ ُ ‫قْدّيَ ْذ َه‬ ُّ ‫*قَ ّْدّ(ّفِع‬

)‫لّمضاِّرع‬
َ
‫بّإىلّامل ْد َر َسِّة‬ َّ ‫قْدّ ّذَ َه‬ )‫**قَ ّْدّ(ّفِعلّماض‬
َ
ِ ‫ستَ ْذهب‬
ُ‫ّفاط َم ّة‬ ّ‫س‬
ُ َ َ َ ***
ِ ‫وفّتَ ْذهب‬
ُ‫ّفاط َم ّة‬ َّ ‫**** َس‬
‫وف‬
ُ َ َ ‫َس‬

* ‫ قد‬with a present tense verbs gives the meaning of 'maybe'

** ‫ قد‬with a past tense verbs gives the meaning of 'certainly'

***ّ‫ّس‬with a present tense verbs means more directly in the future
**** ّ‫ سوف‬with a present tense verbs means later in the future

‫| احلُُروف الباقِيَة‬These are the remaining particles. In the al-Muqaddama al-Ajrūmīyya the author
states:
ِ ‫ّاالس ِمّو َّالّدلِيل‬
ِ ‫ّالف‬
ّ‫عل‬ ِ ‫ّدلِيل‬
ُ َ َ ُ َ ُ‫ّم َعه‬
َ ‫اّالّيُصلَ ُح‬
َ ‫ّم‬َ ‫رف‬
ُ َ‫َوّاحل‬
The particle is that which neither the signs for nouns or verbs applies (anything that is not a verb or
noun is a particle).

15
Reading 1.4 | The Signs of a ‫فعل‬
In the Arabic language a ‫فعل‬ is a verb. It is a word that has an intrinsic meaning with a tense
attached to it. Just as there are many ways to identify verbs in the English language there are also
many ways to identify ‫ أَفْعال‬within the Arabic language. The ‫ فعل‬has three tenses: past, present and
command. The biggest misunderstanding students have is that the future tense is considered a tense
on its own but in Arabic the future and present tense are the same.
The issue with signs of verbs is that many of these signs are not always present. Thus if we are to
recognize a verb from another text due to one of these signs below then we can use qiyas or analogy
to conclude that this word will always be a verb in any other context. This way, if you are to derive a
word as a verb from one exercise you can use that as evidence for other exercises.

‫ | قَ ْد‬One of the signs of a verb is that if a word comes before ‫ قَ ّْد‬then it is a verb. It is important
to understand that the meaning changes depending on which tense proceeds after the ّ‫ ّقَ ْد‬:
1. If a ‫ّفِعلّ ُّمضاِّرع‬ present tense verb comes after ّ‫ّقَ ْد‬ then it means something similar to
'possibly' or 'maybe'.

ّ‫بّإىلّامل ْد َر َس ِة‬
ُ ‫ | قْدّيَ ْذ َه‬He might go to school
َ
2. If a past tense verb comes after ‫د‬
ّْ َ‫ّّق‬then it places extra emphasis translating as 'definitely'.

ّ‫بّإىلّامل ْد َر َس ِة‬
َّ ‫ | قْدّ ّذَ َه‬He definitely went to school
َ
‫س‬
َ - ‫وف‬
َ ‫ | َس‬A word that comes after ‫س‬
َّ ّor ‫وف‬
َّ ‫ّ َس‬is always a verb indicating a future tense.
1. ّ‫س‬
َ ّ- Indicates something that occurs more immediately in the future
ِ ‫ | ستَ ْذهب‬Fatimah will go (right now)
ُ‫ّفاط َم ّة‬ ُ َ َ
2. ّ‫وف‬
َ ‫ّ َس‬- Indicates some that will occur further in the future.
ِ ‫وفّتَ ْذهب‬
ُ‫ّفاط َم ّة‬ ُ َ َ ‫ | َس‬Fatimah will go (a bit later)

ْ ‫الساكِنَ ِة‬
)‫(ت‬ ِ ِ ِ
َ ‫ | ََتء التَأْنيث‬The ‫ت‬
ّْ only appears in the past tense of the feminine singular form,
thus whenever you see it the word must be a ‫فعل‬.
ّ‫تاب‬ ِ ْ ‫فاطمةُّقَرأ‬
ِ
َ ‫َتّالك‬ َ َ | Fatimah read the book

16
‫ف ‪ and‬ا َلأ ْفعا َل ‪Exercise 1.2 | Identifying‬‬
‫الحرو َ‬
‫‪ in the short passage below using the‬احلروف ‪ and‬األفْعال ‪Instructions | Identify all of the‬‬
‫‪evidences from al-Muqaddama al-Ajrūmīyya. A few examples have already been done for you.‬‬

‫ّالعربِيَّ ِة ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َزي ٌدّطَالِب‪ّّ.‬قَ ْدّ َذه ِ‬

‫تّ‬
‫ُخ ُ‬ ‫تّأ ْ‬ ‫ّّيفّال َمْرَك ِز‪َ ّ.‬ذ َهبَ ْ‬ ‫وع َ َ‬‫ض َ‬ ‫س َّم ْو ُ‬‫بّم ْنّأ َْم ِري َكاّإ َىلّاأل ُْرُدن‪َ ّ.‬سيَ ْد ُر ُ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ٌ‬
‫ُسبُوعُّاأل ََّو ُلّ‬ ‫ّالعَربِيَّةَّأ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫س‪ّ.‬قَ ْدّ َكا َنّاأل ْ‬‫َوّالّتَ ْد ُر ُ‬ ‫س َ‬ ‫َزيدّ أَيْضاّإ َىلّاأل ُْرُد ّنّوّا ْس ُم َهاّفَاط َم ّةُّ َوّقَ ْدّتَ ْد ُر ُ‬
‫ّدر ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ّمنّأَنَّهّدر ِ‬ ‫ّالدراس ِةّعلَ َّ ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ّ ِ‬
‫ّسنَة‪ّ.‬قَ ْدّ‬ ‫استهّبَ ْع َد َ‬ ‫يّزي ٌّدّم ْن َ َ‬ ‫وفّيَنْ تَ ِه َ‬ ‫‪ّ.‬س َ‬‫سّ َكثريا َ‬ ‫ىّالرَغم ّ ْ ُ َ َ َ‬ ‫ص ْعباّلَزيد ِّيف َ َ َ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ات‪ّ .‬‬ ‫الو ِاجبَ ِّ‬ ‫لد ُر ِّ‬
‫وسّوّ َ‬ ‫اّزي ٌدّ ِِّب ُ‬ ‫وف ّّيس ِ‬
‫اع ُد َه َ‬ ‫ّس َ ُ َ‬ ‫ص ِلّاحلَ ِاِل َّو َ‬ ‫اسةَّبَ ْع َدّال َف ْ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُختُهُّالد َر َ‬
‫تَ ْب َدأُّأ ْ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪Sign of Verb‬‬ ‫‪Sign of Verb‬‬
‫‪and‬‬
‫احلروف‪ّ/‬ا ّألَفْعالّ ّ‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫احلروف‪ّ/‬ا ّألَفْعالّ ّ‬ ‫‪Type of‬‬
‫‪Type of‬‬
‫‪Preposition‬‬ ‫‪Preposition‬‬

‫ب‬
‫ذَ َه َ‬ ‫بعد قَ ْد‬

‫ِم ْن‬ ‫ُح ُروف اخلَفض‪/‬اجلَِّر‬

‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬

‫‪17‬‬
Exercise 1.3| Identifying Parts of Speech
Identify all of the parts of speech based upon the evidences from al-Muqaddama al-Ajrūmīyya.

Type Word Type Word

ّ‫كِتَاِب‬ ّ‫ت‬
ْ َ‫ذَ َهب‬

ْ ‫فَ ِر َح‬
ّ‫ت‬ ‫الولَد‬
َ
ّ‫فَر َِح‬ ‫َسيَّ َارّة‬

ّ‫الس َم َوات‬
َ ٌ‫َر ُج ّل‬
‫الطَا ِولَة‬ ‫يف‬

‫ب‬
ُّ ُ‫وفّيَكْت‬
َ ‫َس‬ ّ‫يفّبَيت‬

‫ت‬
َّّ ُ ‫قَ ْدّذَ َهْب‬ ِ َ‫ِم ْنّب‬
ّ‫ني‬

ِ ‫امّالش‬
ّ‫َّاب‬ ُ ‫طَ َع‬ ّ‫ِِبّل َقلَِم‬

ُّ ِ‫َسّنَ ْجل‬
‫س‬ ‫قَ ْدّيَ ُكو ُّن‬

ّ‫قَ ْدّّيُ َسافُِر‬ ّ‫ِيفّالغُرفَِة‬

18
Reading Comprehension #1 | Prophet Ibrahim

Instructions | Answer the following questions from Prophet Ibrahim Sections 1 & 2. You
may only use the book and the list of vocabulary words listed below as an aid.

The questions are arranged by section. Answer the questions on a separate sheet of paper or
on this document and send it back to the course via the instructions posted in the
assignment link.

‫ – آزار‬Azar (name)
‫َصنام‬ ‫الذِبب‬ ُّ - flies
ْ ‫ – األ‬idols
‫ – ال َقْرية‬village ‫ّيَ ْدفَ ُّع‬/‫ – َدفَ َع‬to push away
‫ضُّّر‬ َّ ‫ – ال َف‬mouse
‫أر‬
ُ َ‫ي‬/‫ضَّر‬َ – to harm
ّ‫ّيَْن َف ُع‬/‫ – نَ َف َع‬to benefit ‫ – إِ َّّن‬indeed

Section 2
Section 1

1. What was Azar's position? 1. What was the name of Azar's son?

2. What would the people do as a form 2. Name three things that Ibrahim
of worship to the idols? noticed about the idols.

3. Provide at least two characteristics 3. What did Ibrahim say to himself after
of Azar seeing/realizing these things about the
idols?

19
Translation #1 | Prophet Ibrahim
Instructions | Read Sections 1 & 2 of Prophet Ibrahim. Use the following words to help
you with the translation.
Words:

‫ – آزار‬Azar (name)
‫َصنام‬ ْ ‫ – األ‬idols
‫ – ال َقْرية‬village
‫ضُّّر‬
ُ َ‫ي‬/‫ضَّر‬ َ – to harm
‫ّيَْن َف ُّع‬/‫ – نَ َف َع‬to benefit
‫الذِبب‬ ُّ - flies
‫ّيَ ْدفَ ُّع‬/‫ – َدفَ َع‬to push away
َّ ‫ – ال َف‬mouse
‫أر‬
‫ – إِ َّّن‬indeed

20
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

21
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

22
Apply #1 | Parts of Speech in Sūra Yusuf
Read the following verses from Sūra Yūsuf and classify the specified words such as ّ‫حرف‬,
‫ّاسم‬,ّ‫ فعل‬using the aforementioned evidences. Surah Yusuf is provided on the page under
the heading 'Introduction to the Course.' Be sure to give your reason.

Type of Word and Reason Word Verse

‫راودت‬
‫بيت‬ 23

‫ت‬
ّ ‫قال‬
‫َهت‬ 24

‫قال‬ 26

ّ‫سوف‬
98

‫أستغفر‬
‫كان‬
‫قصص‬
‫عبّة‬
‫ل‬ 111

‫أوِل‬
‫األلباب‬
‫كان‬

23
Mastery Exercise #1| Analyzing Sūra al-Maryam
Instructions | Identify every underlined word related to the parts of speech: the signs of
‘isms and verbs as well as the appropriate category of the particle. Use the translation as an
aid to help identify the parts of speech. (All translations are from Shakir's translation).

ّ ١٦﴿ّ‫ّّشرقِيًّا‬
َ ‫اّم َكان‬ ِ ِ ‫ابّّمرَيّّإِ ِذّّانْتَ ب َذ‬ ِ
َ َ ِ َ‫واذْ ُك ّرِّّيفّّالْكت‬
﴾
ْ َ ‫تّّم ْنّّأ َْهل َه‬
ْ َ ْ ْ َ
And mention Marium in the Book when she drew aside from her family to an eastern place;

ِ ِِ ‫ّّمن‬ ِ ْ ‫ّاَّتَ َذ‬

َّ َ‫ف‬
﴾١٧﴿ّّ‫اّس ِوًّّي‬
َ ‫ّشر‬
َ َ‫وحنَاّفَتَمثَّلّّ ََلَاّب‬
َ َ َ ‫ّّدوِنمّّح َجاِبّّفَأ َْر َسلْنَاّإِلَْي‬
َ ‫ّهّاّر‬
ُ ُ ْ ‫ت‬
ْ
So she took a veil (to screen herself) from them; then We sent to her Our spirit, and there appeared to
her a well-made man.

ّ ١٨﴿ّ‫تّّتَ ِقيًّا‬
﴾ َ ‫كّّإِ ْنّّّ ُكْن‬
ِ ‫ّلر ْح ِن‬
َ ‫ّّمْن‬ َ َّ ‫تّّإِِنّّأَعُوذُّّ ِِب‬
ْ َ‫قَال‬
She said: Surely I fly for refuge from you to the Beneficent Allah, if you are one guarding (against evil).

ّ ١٩﴿ّ‫اّزكِيًّا‬
﴾ َ ‫كّغُ َالم‬ ِ‫ك‬
ِّ َ‫ّّأل ََهبّّل‬ِ ِ‫ولّّرب‬
ُ ‫الّّإََِّّنَاّّأَ َنّّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
َ َ َ
He said: I am only a messenger of your Lord: That I will give you a pure boy.

﴾٢٠﴿ّ‫َكّّبَغِيًّا‬ ّ ِ ‫َّنّّيَ ُكو ُن‬

ُ ‫ِّّلّغُ َال ٌمّّوَلَّّْيَْسس ِنّّبَ َشرّّوَلّّْأ‬ َّ ‫تّّأ‬
ْ َ‫قَال‬
ٌَ َْ َ
She said: When shall I have a boy and no mortal has yet touched me, nor have I been unchaste?

ِ ‫َّاسّّور ْحة‬
ِ ‫ّّمنَّاّّۚوَكا َنّّأَمراّم ْق‬ ِ ِ ِ ُّ‫الّّرب‬ ِ ِ‫الّّّ َك َذل‬
ّ ٢١﴿ّ‫ضيًّا‬
﴾ َ ْ َ ََ ٌ ِ‫ّّه‬
َ ِ ‫نيّّّۚولنَ ْج َعلَّهُّّآيَةّّللن‬ َ ‫ّعلَ َّي‬
َ َ ّ‫ّّه ّو‬
ُ‫ك‬ َ َ‫كّّق‬
َ َ َ‫ق‬
َ
He said: Even so; your Lord says: It is easy to Me: and that We may make him a sign to men and a mercy
from Us, and it is a matter which has been decreed.

ِ َ‫تّّبِِهّّم َكانّّق‬
ّ ٢٢﴿ّّ‫صيًّا‬
﴾ َ ْ ‫فَ َحملَْتهُّّفَانْتَ بَ َذ‬
َ
So she conceived him; then withdrew herself with him to a remote place.

ِ ْ‫تّّقَبلّّه َذاّّوُكنْتّّنَسياّمن‬ ِ ِ ‫فَأَجاءّهاّّالْمخاضّّإِ َىل‬

ِ ‫ّّج ْذ ِعّّالن‬
ّ ٢٣﴿ّ‫سيًّا‬
﴾ َ ْ ُ ََ ْ ُّ ‫ّّّيّّلَْي تَ ِنّّم‬
َ َ‫ت‬ ْ َ‫َّخلَةّّقَال‬
ْ ُ َ َ َ َ َ
24
And the throes (of childbirth) compelled her to betake herself to the trunk of a palm tree. She said: Oh,
would that I had died before this, and had been a thing quite forgotten!

﴾٢٤﴿ّّ‫ّّس ِرًّّي‬ِ َْ ‫ك‬ِ ُّ‫َّّتزِنّّقَ ْدّّجعلّّرب‬ َِْ ‫اّمن‬

ِ
َ ‫َّّتتَك‬ ََ ََ ََْ ‫َّّتت َهاّأََّال‬
ْ ‫فَنَ َاد َاه‬
Then (the child) called out to her from beneath her: Grieve not, surely your Lord has made a stream to
flow beneath you;

ّ ٢٥﴿ّ‫ّّجنِيًّا‬ ِ َ ‫َّخلَ ِةّّتُساقِ ْط‬ ِِ ‫ك‬ِ ‫و ُه ِزيّإِلَي‬

﴾ َ ‫ّّعلَْيكّّرطَبا‬
ُ ْ ‫ِّّب ْذ ِعّّالن‬
َ ْ َ
And shake towards you the trunk of the palmtree, it will drop on you fresh ripe dates:

ّ‫ّص ْوماّفَلَ ْنّّأُ َكلِ َّم‬ ِ ‫ّّم ّنّّالْب َش ِرّّأَحداّفَ ُق ِوِلّّإِِنّّنَ َذر‬
َ ّ‫تّّل َّلر ْحَ ِّن‬
ُْ
ِ
َ َ َ ‫ّعْي ناّّۚفَِإ َّماّتَ َريِ َّن‬
َ ّ‫ّّوقَ ِري‬
َ ‫ّّوا ْشَرِب‬
ِ
َ ‫فَ ُكلي‬
﴾٢٦﴿ّ‫سيًّا‬ ِ ْ‫الْي ومّّإِن‬
ََْ
So eat and drink and refresh the eye. Then if you see any mortal, say: Surely I have vowed a fast to the
Beneficent Allah, so I shall not speak to any man today.

ِ ‫اَّت ِملُّهّّّۚقَالُواّّّيّّمرَيّّلََق ْد‬

ِ ‫ّّجْئ‬ ِ َ‫فَأَت‬
ّ ٢٧﴿ّّ‫ّّشْي ئاّفَ ِرًّّي‬
﴾ َ ‫ت‬ ُ َ َْ ُ َْ ‫تّّبِهّّقَوَم َه‬
ْ ْ
And she came to her people with him, carrying him (with her). They said: O Marium! surely you have
done a strange thing.

ّ ٢٨﴿ّ‫كّّبَغِيًّا‬
ِ ‫تّّأ ُُّم‬
ْ َ‫ّّسوءّّوَم ّاّ َكان‬ ِّ ُ‫ّّم ّاّ َكا َنّّأَب‬
﴾
َ ْ ََ َ‫ّامرأ‬
ْ ّ‫وك‬ َ ‫ّهارو َن‬
َ ّ‫ت‬
ُ َّ ‫ُخ‬
ْ ‫َّيّّأ‬
O sister of Haroun! your father was not a bad man, nor, was your mother an unchaste woman.

ِ ّ ِّ‫َشارتّّإِلَي ِهّّّۚقَالُوّاّ َكيفّّنُ َكلِمّّمنّّّ َكا َّن‬

ّ ٢٩﴿ّ‫ّّصبِيًّّا‬
﴾ َ ‫ّيفّّالْم ْهد‬
َ َْ َْ
ُ ْ ْ َ ‫فَأ‬ َ
But she pointed to him. They said: How should we speak to one who was a child in the cradle?

ّ ٣٠﴿ّ‫ج َعلَ ِنّّنَبِيًّا‬ ِ ّ ِ‫ّاّللِّّآ ََت‬ ّ ِِ‫الّّإ‬

﴾ َ ‫ابّّو‬
َ َ َ‫نّّالْكت‬ َ َّّ ّ‫ّعْب ُّد‬
َ ّ‫ن‬ َ َ‫ق‬
He said: Surely I am a servant of Allah; He has given me the Book and made me a prophet;

ِ َّ ‫لص َالةِّّو‬
َّ ‫ص ِانّّ ِِب‬
ّ ٣١﴿ّ‫ّّحيًّا‬
﴾ َ ‫ت‬
ُ ‫ّد ْم‬
ُ ّ‫ّّما‬
َ ‫الزَكاة‬ َ َ ‫تّّوأ َْو‬
ُ ‫ّّم ّاّ ُكْن‬
َ ُ ‫و َج َعلَ ِن‬
َ ‫ّّمبَاركاّأَيْن‬
َ َ َ
And He has made me blessed wherever I may be, and He has enjoined on me prayer and poor-rate so
long as I live;
ّ ٣٢﴿ّ‫اّش ِقيًّا‬ ِ
َْ ْ‫وّبَ ًّراّبِوال َدِِتّّوَل‬
﴾ َ ‫َّّي َعلْ ِن‬
َ ‫ّّجبَّار‬ َ َ َ
25
And dutiful to my mother, and He has not made me insolent, unblessed;

﴾٣٣﴿ّ‫ّّحيًّا‬ ِ
َ ‫ث‬
ُ ‫وتّّويَوَمّّأُبْ َع‬
َْ ُ ‫تّّويَوَمّّأ َُم‬
َْ ُ ‫ّّعلَ َّيّّيَوَمّّول ْد‬
ُ ْ َ ُ‫الس َالم‬
َّ ‫و‬ َ
And peace on me on the day I was born, and on the day I die, and on the day I am raised to life.

َّ ‫ّّمرَيَّّّۚقَو َّلّّا ْحلَ ِقّّالَّ ِذيّّفِ ِيهَّّيَََْتُو‬

﴾٣٤﴿ّ‫ن‬
ْ ْ ُ
ِ َ ِ‫َذل‬
َ ‫كّّعيسىّّابْن‬
َ
Such is Isa, son of Marium; (this is) the saying of truth about which they dispute.

‫اسم‬ ‫فعل‬ ‫حرف‬

26
27
28
CHAPTER TWO
Defining Verbs

Overview
In this module there is a preparation and proficiency section which are both required while
the mastery section is only highly recommended to finish. Within the preparation section we
introduce you to verbs. After completing the required readings and videos you will be given
exercises within ‫ القصصّالنبيني‬and other texts such as the Qur'an and hadith to ensure
understanding. After completing all the required parts you will be asked to do a reading
comprehension exercise within ‫ القصصّالنبيني‬along with enrichment exercises from Sūra Ta-
Ha and other hadiths. Lastly, in order to obtain the level of mastery attempt to complete the
exercise of selected verses from Sūra Nuh.

If you are able to complete all of this not only will you have mastered verbs but you will also
have added a wealth of knowledge from the stories of Prophet Ibrahim, Prophet Musa, and
Prophet Nuh!

29
Reading 2.1 | Introduction to Verbs
The ‫ فعل‬or the verb is one of the three parts of speech, and it is defined as a word with a
meaning which is always connected to a tense. Two of the three tenses (Past, Present,
Command) are shown below with their conjugations usingّ‫ل‬,‫ع‬,‫ ف‬as the root of the verb.

For words with other root letters just simply replaceّ‫ فعل‬with the three letter roots.

Present Tense Past Tense Pronouns

‫ضارِع‬ ِ
َ ‫الف ْعلّال ُم‬ ‫اضي‬ ِ
ِ ‫الف ْعلّال م‬ ‫الض ََ َمائِر‬
َ
ّ‫أَفْ َع ُل‬ ّ‫ت‬
ُ ‫فَ َع ْل‬ ّ‫"– أ ََن‬I"

First Person
ّ‫نَ ْف َع ُل‬ ‫فَ َع ْلنا‬ ّ‫" – ََْن ُن‬We"
‫تَ ْف َع ُّل‬ ّ‫ت‬ َ ‫فَ َع ْل‬ ّ‫ت‬ َ ْ‫" – أَن‬You (M.)"
ِّ ‫تَ ْف َع‬
‫الن‬ ‫فَ َع ْلتُ َما‬ ‫" –ّأَنْتُ َم ا‬You Dual (M.)"

Second Person
‫تَ ْف َعلُو َّن‬ ‫فَ َع ْلتُ ّْم‬ ‫" –ّأَنْتُ ّْم‬You All (M.)"
َّ ِ‫تَ ْف َعل‬
‫ني‬ ِّ ‫فَ َع ْل‬
‫ت‬ ِّ ْ‫" – أَن‬You (F.)"
‫ت‬
ِّ ‫تَ ْف َع‬
‫الن‬ ‫فَ َعلْتُ َما‬ ‫" – أَنْتُ َم ا‬You Dual (F.)"
‫تَ ْف َعلْ َّن‬ َّّ ُ ْ‫فَ َعل‬
‫ت‬ َّّ ُ ْ‫" –ّأَن‬You All (F.)"
‫ت‬
‫يَ ْف َع ُّل‬ ‫فَ َع َّل‬ ‫" – ُه َّو‬He"
ِّ ‫يَ ْف َع‬
‫الن‬ َّ ‫فَ َع‬
‫ال‬ ‫" – َُهَا‬Them (Dual M.)"
Third Person

ّ‫يَ ْف َعل ٌُّو َن‬ ‫فَ َعلُو ٌّْا‬ ‫" – ُه ّْم‬Them"

‫تَ ْف َع ُّل‬ ّْ َ‫فَ َعل‬
‫ت‬ ‫" – ِه َّي‬She"
ِّ ‫تَ ْف َع‬
‫الن‬ ّ‫فَ َعّلَ تَا‬ ‫" – َُهَا‬Them (Dual F.)"
‫يَ ْف َعلْ َّن‬ ‫فَ َعلْ َّن‬ ‫" – ُه َّّن‬Them (F.)"

30
Reading 2.2 | The Six Abwāb
As you noticed above, the past and present tense had a fatha above the second root letter, the

‫ع‬. However, this is not the case for every verb. Present and past tense verbs occur on six set
patterns called “The Six Abwāb.” These determine the changing of the short vowel on the
middle root letter, from past tense to present tense.

ّ‫‘ املضارع‬Present Tense’ ّ‫‘ املاضي‬Past Tense’

ّ‫ِببّفَتَ َح‬ ّ‫يَ ْف َع ُل‬
ّ‫ب‬
َ ‫ِببّضَر‬
َ ‫يَ ْفعِ ُّل‬ ‫فَ َع َّل‬
ّ‫صَر‬ َ َ‫ِببّن‬ ‫يَ ْفعُ ُّل‬
ّ‫ِببّعلِ َم‬
َ ‫يَ ْف َع ُّل‬
ّ‫فَعِ َل‬
ّ‫ب‬ ِ ‫يَ ْفعِ ُّل‬
َ ‫ِببّحس‬ َ
ّ‫ِببّ َك ُرَم‬ ّ‫يَ ْفعُ ُل‬ ‫فَعُ َّل‬

Example: Write the verb ‫ط‬

َّ َ‫ َحب‬in the present tense form of ‫ب‬
َّ ‫ِببّضر‬
َ with ‫ ه ّو‬as the
َ
pronoun.
ُ ِ‫ََْيب‬
ّ‫ط‬

ّ ‫ َح ِس‬is very rare; only about a dozen verbs in the entire Arabic
Notes | The bāb of ‫ب‬
َ
language are on this pattern.

The bāb of ‫كرم‬

َ is often used to describe permanent traits and is intransitive.
ُ

31
Exercise 2.1 | Six Abwāb
Instructions | Please fill in the following table on the six abwab.

Present Tense Voweling Past Tense Voweling

ّ‫فَتَ َح‬
ُ ‫ض ِر‬
ّ‫ب‬ ْ َ‫ي‬
ّ‫صَر‬
َ َ‫ن‬
ّ‫يَ ْعلَ ُم‬
ّ‫ب‬ ِ
َ ‫َحس‬
ُ‫يَك ُْرّم‬

Instructions | Using your knowledge of the babs, please fill in the table for the following
hypothetical verbs. The roots are read from right to left.

Roots On the bab of… Past Tense Present Tense

‫ف‬
ّ ّ–ّ‫ثّ–ّن‬ ‫ضرب‬
‫ج‬
ّ ّ–ّ‫غّ–ّم‬ ّ‫كرم‬
‫ش‬
ّ ّ–ّ‫رّ–ّّض‬ ‫عل ّم‬
‫تّ–ّصّ–ّ ّك‬ ‫نصر‬

32
Exercise 2.2 | Past Tense

Instructions | Please fill out the following chart using the verb ‫ب‬
َّ َ‫ َكت‬for the past tense
conjugation in Form 1. Make sure to vowel each letter.

‫هو‬
‫أن‬
‫َنن‬
ّ‫أنت‬
َ
ِّ
‫أنت‬
‫ه ّم‬
‫ه ّي‬
ّ‫أنت‬
َّ
‫( َها‬f)
‫( أنتما‬m)
‫هن‬
َّّ
‫( َها‬m)
‫أنتم‬
‫( أنتما‬f)

33
Exercise 2.3 | Past Tense

Instructions | Please fill out the following chart using the verb ‫س‬
ّ ‫ َد َر‬, on the bab of ‫نصر‬, for
َ
the present tense conjugation in Form 1. Make sure to vowel each letter.

‫أن‬
‫َنن‬
ّ‫أنت‬
َ
‫هو‬
ِّ
‫أنت‬
‫ه ّي‬
ّ‫أنتما‬
‫( َها‬m)
‫( أنتما‬f)
‫( َها‬f)
‫( أنتم‬m)
‫ه ّم‬
ّ‫أنت‬
‫هن‬
ّ

34
Reading 2.3| Forming the Command
The command tense is the third tense of verbs in Arabic and is derived from the present
tense; it is equivalent to the Latin “imperative”. This tense is always used for the second
person.

Steps Example

Since the Command tense is derived from the present tense, the starting point
‫ب‬
ُّ ‫تَ ْذ َه‬
will be a present tense verb in the second person.

1. The first step is to change the vowel on the last letter to a ‫ن‬
ّ ‫سكو‬. ‫ب‬
ّْ ‫تَ ْذ َه‬

2. After this, the present tense prefix (in all second-person pronoun
‫ب‬
ّْ ‫ْذ َه‬
conjugations this will be a ‫ )ت‬is dropped.

3. Now, if the verb begins with a ‫سكون‬, an extra letter is added, which
‫ب‬
ّْ ‫ا ْذ َه‬
resembles an alif, but takes a vowel. This is called a ‫ل‬
ّ ‫َهزةّالوص‬
4. The final step is to vowel the added ‫ َهزةّالوصل‬appropriately. If the

middle root letter of the original verb has a ‫ ضمة‬then the ‫ َهزةّالوصل‬will take
ّْ ‫اِ ْذ َه‬
‫ب‬
a ‫ضمة‬.

In all other cases the ‫ َهزةّالوصل‬takes a ‫كسرة‬.

Example | ُّ ‫ تَ ْد ُر‬-ّ‫س‬
ّ‫س‬ ْ ‫ّتَ ْد ُر‬-ّ‫س‬
ْ ‫ّ ْد ُر‬-ّ‫س‬
ْ ‫ّ ْاد ُر‬-‫س‬
ّْ ‫ّاُ ْد ُر‬
Step Step Step Step Step
1 2 3 4a 4b

35
In cases where you are trying to make a command fromّ)‫أنتما(هو‬,ّ)‫أنتما(هي‬,ّ‫أنتم‬

ّ‫ت‬ ِ ْ‫أَن‬, step 1 slightly changes. Instead of putting a ‫ سكون‬on the last letter such as on
َّ ‫ تَ ْد ُر‬we simply remove the ‫ن‬. The rest of the steps are the same. For ‫ أنتم‬we add a
‫سني‬
silent alif in the command form as an indicator to distinguish the ‫ و‬which is attached

to the command from a normal ‫ و‬which means "and".

ِّ ْ‫| )أَن‬
Example (‫ت‬ َّ ‫ تَ ْد ُرِّس‬-ّ‫ّتَ ْد ُرِّسي‬-ّ‫ّ ْد ُر ِّسي‬-ّ‫ّ ْاد ُرِّسي‬-‫ّاُ ْد ُرِّسي‬
ّ‫ني‬
Step Step Step Step Step
1 2 3 4a 4b

Example (‫| )أنتم‬ ّ‫ تَ ْد ُر ُّسو َّن‬-ّ‫ّتَ ْد ُر ُّسوا‬-ّ‫ّ ْد ُر ُّسوا‬-ّّ‫ّ ْاد ُر ُّسوا‬-ّ‫ّاُ ْد ُر ُّسوا‬
Step Step Step Step Step
1 2 3 4a 4b

Example ()‫| )أنتما(هو‬ ِّ ‫ ّيَ ْد ُر ُّس‬-ّ‫ّّيَ ْد ُرسا‬-ّ‫ّ ْد ُر ُّسا‬-ّ‫ّ ْاد ُر ُّسا‬-ّ‫ّاُ ْد ُر ُّسا‬
ّ‫ان‬
Step Step Step Step Step
1 2 3 4a 4b

36
Reading 2.4 | ‫الهمز َة‬
The ‫صل‬
ْ ‫ ََه َزةّالو‬is a special kind of letter which falls in between the normal ‫( َهزة‬also called the
َ
‫ ) ََه َزةّال َقطْع‬and the long vowel letters (‫)ا ّو ي‬, specifically the ‫ألف‬. It resembles the ‫ ألف‬in

appearance, the only difference being that it can take any of the three short vowels ( ‫كات‬
َ‫) َحر‬, َ
whereas an ‫ ألف‬always has a ‫كون‬
ُ ‫ ُس‬. However, the other long letters (‫ ّو‬and ‫ )ي‬can take short
vowels.

It is called the ‫ َهزةّالوصل‬because if it comes between two short vowels it is not pronounced.

Instead it connects (‫ )وصل‬the sounds around it, for example like the pronunciation of the

phrase ‫( ِِبلْ َقلَِّم‬bilqalam). However, if the ‫ َهزةّالوصل‬comes at the beginning of a sentence it is

ّ ‫ّج ِم‬
pronounced, for example the pronunciation of the first word in the sentence ‫يل‬ َ ‫يت‬
ُ َ‫الب‬. ٌ

‫حروف‬ ‫مهزة الوصل‬ ‫مهزة القطع‬

ّ‫اّّْوّي‬ ِّ‫اَّّاُّّا‬ ‫إأؤئء‬

Commonly Found Commonly Found

• In the definite particle ‫ل‬

ّ‫ا‬ • As a root letter such as in the
words ‫ل‬
َّ َ‫ َّسّأ‬- َ‫ّأََّّول – ّبَ َّدّأ‬
• In the command tense
• In ‫ أن‬conjugation in the present
• In some words such as
• ‫اسم‬ ّ ‫ّأَفّْ َّع‬, ‫أُفَعِ ّل‬
tense, such as ‫ل‬
ُ ُ
• ‫ابن‬ • In Form 4, in ‫الفعلّاملاضي‬, ّ‫الفعل‬

• ‫اثنان‬ ‫األمر‬, and ‫املصد ّر‬

• In Forms 7 to 10

37
Exercise 2.4| Command Tense and ‫الهمز َة‬

Form the command tense from the present tense verbs given below.

‫األمر‬ ‫ال مضارع‬ ‫األمر‬ ‫ال مضارع‬

ّ‫تَ ْفتَ ُح‬ ّ‫س‬

ُ ‫تَ ْد ُر‬
ْ‫اِقْ َرّأ‬ ّ‫اُ ْخ ُر ْج‬
‫ث‬
ُّ ‫ّتَ ْم ُك‬ ّ‫تَ ْمنَ ُع‬
ّ‫س‬ ِِ ّْ ِ‫اِ ْجل‬
ْ ‫الْب‬ ‫س‬
ّ‫ََْتَز ُن‬ ّ‫ح‬
ُ ‫تَ ْفَر‬

Identify the type of hamza in the following words.

Type Word Type Word

‫البيت‬ ّ‫َسأ ََل‬

ّْ ‫اِ ْذ َه‬
‫ب‬ ِ َ‫اِثْن‬
ّ‫ني‬

ُ‫أَفْ َع ّل‬ ُ‫ض ّل‬

َ ْ‫أَف‬
‫اِ ْس ٌّم‬ ّ‫أ َْم َك َن‬
َ‫قَ َرّأ‬ ‫اِ ْج َع ّْل‬
‫ّاج َع ّْل‬
ْ ‫َو‬ ‫يفّأَس َما ّء‬
ّ‫ّك‬
َ ‫اّاس ُم‬
ْ ‫َم‬ ْ َ‫ِب‬
‫ّح َك ِّم‬

38
Exercise 2.5 | Verb Conjugations and Commands
Change the following verbs from their singular to their dual and plural forms, keeping in
mind tense and gender agreement. The first example has already been done for you.

Plural Dual Singular

‫ذَ َهبُوّا‬ ‫ذَ َهبَا‬ ّ‫ب‬

َ ‫ذَ َه‬
َّّ ُ ‫َد َر ْس‬
‫ت‬
ِ ‫ََْيلِس‬
ّ‫ان‬ َ
ّ‫ب‬
ُ ُ‫تَكْت‬
ّ‫َم َسكْتُ َما‬
ّ‫يَ ْقَرُؤو َن‬
ّ‫َجلَ َستَا‬
ّ‫ني‬ ِ
َ ‫تَ ْفَرح‬
ِ ‫ي ْلبِس‬
ّ‫ان‬ َ َ
ّ‫ت‬
َ ْ ‫يَ ْس ُك‬
‫َمنَ َعا‬
ّ‫َشبِ َع‬
ِ ‫يسمع‬
ّ‫ان‬ََ ْ َ
‫َس َقطُوا‬
ّ‫َم َكثْتُ َما‬
َ ‫تَ ْنظُِر‬
ّ‫ين‬

39
‫‪Conjugate the following verbs in past and present tense, using your knowledge of the six‬‬
‫‪abwāb.‬‬

‫ج م عّ(علىِّببّفتحّ)‬
‫‪Past Tense‬‬ ‫َنن‬ ‫أن‬
‫أنت ّم‬ ‫أنتما‬ ‫أنت‬
‫أنتّ‬ ‫أنتما‬ ‫أنت‬
‫هم‬ ‫َها‬ ‫ه ّو‬
‫هنّ‬ ‫َها‬ ‫ه ّي‬
‫‪Present Tense‬‬ ‫َنن‬ ‫أن‬
‫أنت ّم‬ ‫أنتما‬ ‫أنت‬
‫أنتّ‬ ‫أنتما‬ ‫أنت‬
‫هم‬ ‫َها‬ ‫ه ّو‬
‫هنّ‬ ‫َها‬ ‫ه ّي‬
‫ك س رّ(علىِّببّضربّ)‬
‫‪Past Tense‬‬ ‫َنن‬ ‫أن‬
‫أنت ّم‬ ‫أنتما‬ ‫أنت‬
‫أنتّ‬ ‫أنتما‬ ‫أنت‬
‫هم‬ ‫َها‬ ‫ه ّو‬
‫هنّ‬ ‫َها‬ ‫ه ّي‬
‫‪Present Tense‬‬ ‫َنن‬ ‫أن‬
‫أنت ّم‬ ‫أنتما‬ ‫أنت‬
‫أنتّ‬ ‫أنتما‬ ‫أنت‬
‫هم‬ ‫َها‬ ‫ه ّو‬
‫هنّ‬ ‫َها‬ ‫ه ّي‬

‫‪40‬‬
Form the command only for the second person, singular masculine pronoun )‫(أنت‬.
َ

Command Form )ّ‫(أ َْمر‬ Base Verb )‫(فِ ْعل‬

‫ب‬
ُّ ُ‫ّيَكْت‬-ّ‫ب‬
َ َ‫َكت‬
ّ‫س‬ ِ‫ّ ََيل‬-ّ‫جلَس‬
ُ ْ َ َ
‫ّيَ ْزَه ُّد‬-ّ‫َزَه َد‬

‫ّيَ ْس َم ُّع‬-ّ‫َِْس َع‬

ّ‫ّ ََْي ُس ُن‬-ّ‫َح ُس َن‬

ُ‫َد َخ َلّ–ّيَ ْد ُخ ّل‬

ّ‫ح‬
ُ ‫ِحّ–ّيَ ْفَر‬
َ ‫فَر‬
ّ‫ت‬
ُ ُ‫ّيَثْب‬-ّ‫ت‬
َ َ‫ثَب‬

ُ‫ّيَك ُْرّم‬-ّ‫َك ُرَم‬

ّ‫َّيَْنَ ُع‬-ّ‫َمنَ َع‬

41
Reading Comprehension #2 | Prophet Ibrahim

Instructions | Answer the following questions from Prophet Ibrahim Sections 3-5. You
may only use the book and the list of vocabulary words listed below as an aid.

The questions are arranged by section.Answer the questions on separate sheets of paper or
on this document and send it back to the course via the instructions posted in the
assignment link.

ّ‫ض ُع‬
َ َ‫ت‬/‫ض َع‬ َ ‫ – َو‬to place
‫ص َّح‬ َ َ‫ – ن‬to advise
‫ – قَوم‬nation/people
‫ – َك َس َّر‬to break
‫ – ِّح ّينَّئِ ّذ‬then/then afterwards
َّ ‫ فَ َر‬- to enjoy/celebrate
‫ح‬
‫ّم َعنا‬
َ‫ج‬ ُ ‫أالَّت ُر‬
َْ – will you not leave with us?
‫ – َسقيم‬ill/sick
‫ – ماّلَ ُكم‬what is with you (all)?
‫ – ال َفأْس‬axe
ّ‫ – َعلَّق‬he hung/suspended
‫ – عُنُق‬neck

42
Section 3

1. Name two things Ibrahim said to his father about the idols?

2. What was his father's reaction?

3. What did Ibrahim do after he spoke to his father?

4. What were the people's reaction?

5. What did Prophet Ibrahim say to himself at the end?

Section 4

1. What was the occasion which the people left for?

2. Why didn't Ibrahim go with them?

3. What did Ibrahim do once the people left?

4. What did he do with the axe in the end?

Section 5

1. Why did the people go to the idols?

2. What were their initial reactions?

3. What was Ibrahim's response to their accusation?

4. What was Ibrahim's point in doing this? What were there reactions to this?

43
Translation #2 | Prophet Ibrahim
Instructions | Read Sections 3-5 of Prophet Ibrahim and then translate with the given
words below.

Words:

ّ‫ض ُع‬َ َ‫ت‬/‫ض َع‬ َ ‫ – َو‬to place

ّ‫ص َح‬ َ َ‫ –ن‬to advise
ّ‫ –قَوم‬nation/people
ّ‫ – َك َس َر‬to break
ّ‫ – ِحينَئِذ‬then/then afterwards
ّ‫فَ َر َح‬- to enjoy/celebrate
ّ‫ّم َعنا‬
َ‫ج‬ ُ ‫أالَّت ُر‬
َْ – will you not leave with us?
ّ‫ – َسقيم‬ill/sick
ّ‫ –ماّلَ ُكم‬what is with you (all)?
ّ‫ –ال َفأْس‬axe
ّ‫ – َعلَّق‬he hung/suspended
ّ‫ –عُنُق‬neck

44
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

45
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

46
Apply #2 | Identifying Verbs and their Bab
Instructions | Read Sections 3-5 of Prophet Ibrahim. Then complete the following table on
identifying the verb, its tense, the possible babs if possible, and the pronoun. A few
examples have already been done for you.

‫الفعل‬ ّ‫ ُمضارِع‬/‫ُّماض‬ ‫الضمري‬ ّ ‫الباب‬

ّ ‫كان‬ ّ ‫ماض‬ ّ ‫ه ّو‬ N/A

ّّ‫قول‬
ُ َ‫ي‬ ّ ‫ُمضا ِرع‬ ّ ‫ه ّو‬ N/A

ّ ‫تَ ْعبُ ُّد‬ ّ ‫ُمضا ِرع‬ ّ ّ‫ت‬

َ ْ‫أَن‬ ّ ّ‫ّ َك ُرَم‬,‫ص َر‬
َ َ‫ن‬
ّ ّ ّ ّ

ّ ّ ّ ّ

47
ّ ّ ّ ّ

ّ ّ ّ ّ

48
49
Apply #3 | Identify Commands in Sūra ‫ط َه‬
Identify the commands and its bab in the following passage, using the translation for
assistance. Look out for the ‫الوصل‬ ‫مهزة‬.

ّ‫ّآّيتِنَا‬ ِ َ ‫﴾ّ لِنُ ِري‬٢٢﴿ ّ‫ضاء ِّمنّ َغ ِريّسوءّآيةّأُخرى‬ ِ َ‫اضممّي َد َكّإِ َىلّجن‬
َ ‫كّم ْن‬ َ َ ْ َ ُ ْ ْ َ َ ‫َّّتُْر ْجّبَْي‬
َ‫ك‬َ ‫اح‬ َ َ ْ ُ ْ ّ‫َّو‬
ّ‫﴾ َّوّيَ ِس ْر ِِّلّأ َْم ِري‬٢٥﴿ ‫ّص ْد ِري‬ ِ ‫الّر‬ ِ ِ َّ ِ‫بّإ‬ ِ
َ ‫بّا ْشَر ْح ِِّل‬ َ َ َ‫ ّ﴾ّ ق‬٢٤﴿ ‫ىلّف ْر َع ْو َنّإنَّهُّطَغَ ّى‬ ْ ‫﴾ ّا ْذ َه‬٢٣﴿ ‫الْ ُك ْ َبى‬
ِ ‫ِلّوِزير‬
ّ‫اّم ْن‬ َ ّْ ٌِّّْ ‫اج َعل‬ ّ ِ ‫احلُ ْلّعُ ْق َدة ِّمنّلِ َس‬
ّ ِ‫﴾ يَ ْف َق ُهواّقَ ْو‬٢٧﴿ ‫ان‬
ْ ّ‫﴾ّ َّو‬٢٨﴿ ‫ِل‬ ْ ‫﴾ّ َو‬٢٦﴿

ْ ‫﴾ّ ا ٌُّ ْش ُد ْدّبِِهّأ‬٣٠﴿

ّ‫﴾ّسورةّطه‬٣١﴿ّ‫َزِري‬ ِ ‫﴾ هارو َنّأ‬٢٩﴿ ‫أَهلِ ّي‬
‫َخي‬ َُ ْ
Now clasp thy hand to thy arm-pit; it shall come forth white, without evil. That is a second
sign. (22) So We would show thee some of Our greatest signs. (23) Go to Pharaoh; he has
waxed insolent.' (24) 'Lord, open my breast,' said Moses, (25) 'and do Thou ease for me my
task. (26) Unloose the knot upon my tongue, (27) that they may understand my
words. (28) Appoint for me of my folk a familiar, (29) Aaron, my brother; (30) by him
confirm my strength, (31) and associate him with me in my task. (32)

‫األمر‬ ‫الباب‬

50
51
Mastery Exercise #2 | Analyzing Sūra Nuh
Instructions | Identify every verb and command, its tense and the pronoun attached. Use
the translation as an aid to help identify the verbs. (All translations are from Shakir's
translation).

﴾ ّ ِ‫ابّأَل‬
ّ ١﴿ّ‫يم‬
ٌ ٌّ ‫كّ ِمنّقَ ْب ِّلّأَنّ ََيْتِيَ ُه ّمّ َع َذ‬
ْ
ِ ‫ىلّقَوِم ِّهّأَ ّْنّأ‬
َّ ‫َنذ ّْرّقَوَم‬
ْ َّ ِ‫إِ َّّنّأ َْر َسلْنَاّنُوحاّإ‬
ْ
Surely We sent Nuh to his people, saying: Warn your people before there come upon them a painful
chastisement.

﴾ ٌّ ِ‫يرّ ُّمب‬
ّ ٢﴿ّ‫ني‬
ٌ ْ ّ ِِ‫الّ َّّيّقَوِّمّإ‬
ّ ‫نّلَ ُك ّمّنَ ِذ‬ ْ َّ َ‫ق‬
He said: O my people! Surely I am a plain warner to you

ِ ‫وهّوأ‬
ِّ ُ‫َطيع‬ ِّ ‫أ‬
ّ ٣﴿ّ‫ون‬
﴾ ُّ ‫اّللّواتَّ ُق‬
َ َّّ ّ‫َنّ ْاعبُ ُدوا‬
ََ
That you should serve Allah and be careful of (your duty to) Him and obey me

َّ ‫اّللِّإِ َذاّ َج ّاءَّّالّيَُؤ َّخ ّرّّۚلَوّّ ُكنتُ ّمّتَ ْعلَمو‬

ّ‫ن‬
ُ ْ ْ ُ َ َ َ ‫َج ّلّ ُّمس ًّمىّّۚإِ َّّنّأ‬
َّّ ّ‫َج ّل‬ َ َّ ِ‫يَ ْغ ِف ّرّلَ ُكمّ ِمنّذُنُوبِ ُك ّمّويَُؤ ِخرُك ّمّإ‬
َ ‫ىلّأ‬ ْْ َْ ْ
﴾
ّ ٤﴿
He will forgive you some of your faults and grant you a delay to an appointed term; surely the term of
Allah when it comes is not postponed; did you but know!

﴾
َ ّ ‫تّقَوِم‬
ّ ٥﴿ّ‫يّلَْيالّّوَِنَارّا‬
ْ ْ ِّ ‫الّر‬
ّ ِِ‫بّإ‬
ُّ ‫نّ َد َعو‬ َّ َ‫ق‬ َ
He said: O my Lord! surely I have called my people by night and by day!

ّ ٦﴿ّ‫الّفِرارا‬
﴾ َِّّ‫فَلَ ّمّيَِزْد ُه ّمّ ُد َعائِيّإ‬
َ ْ ْ
But my call has only made them flee the more

ّ‫استِكْبَارا‬ ِ ِِ ّ ِّ‫وإِِنّّ ُكلَّماّدعو ُُتُّمّلِتَ ْغ ِف ّرّ ََل ّمّجعلُواّأَصابِعه ّم‬

ْ ّ‫استَك َْبوا‬
ُ ْ ‫َص ُّرواّو‬
ََ ‫استَ ْغ َشواّثيَ َاَبُّمّوأ‬
َْ ْ ْ ‫يفّآ َذاِن ّمّو‬
َْ َُ َ ََ ُ ْ ْ َ ََ ْ ْ َ َ
﴾
ّ ٧﴿
And whenever I have called them that Thou mayest forgive them, they put their fingers in their ears,
cover themselves with their garments, and persist and are puffed up with pride.

52
ّ ٨﴿ّ‫عو ُُتُّمّ ِج َهارا‬
﴾ ّ ِِ‫ُّثَّّإ‬
َ ‫نّ َد‬
ْ ْ
Then surely I called to them aloud.

﴾ ْ ِ‫تّ ََلُّمّإ‬
ّ ٩﴿ّ‫سرارا‬
َ ْ ُّ ‫َسرْر‬
ْ ‫نتّ ََلُّمّوأ‬
َ َْ ّ ِِ‫ُّثَّّإ‬
ُّ َ‫نّأ َْعل‬
Then surely I spoke to them in public and I spoke to them in secret.

﴾ َ ّ‫استَ غْ ِفرواّربَّ ُك ّمّإِنَّهُّّ َكا َّن‬

ّ ١٠﴿ّ‫غفَّارّا‬
ْ َ ُ ْ ّ‫ت‬
ُّ ْ‫فَ ُقل‬
Then I said, Ask forgiveness of your Lord, surely He is the most Forgiving.

﴾ ّ ّ‫ك ّمّ ِم ْدرارا‬

ّ 1١﴿ ُ ‫اءّ َعلَْي‬ َّ ّ‫يُرِس ِّل‬
ّ ‫السم‬
َ ََ ْ
He will send down upon you the cloud, pouring down abundance of rain.

ْ ‫َّاتّوََْي َعلّلَّ ُك ّمّأ‬

ّ ١٢﴿ّ‫َِنَارا‬
﴾
ْ َ ْ َّ ِ‫وَيُْ ِد ْد ُكمّ ِب َْموالّّوبَن‬
ّ ‫نيّوََْي َعلّلَّ ُك ّمّ َجن‬ َ َ َ َ
And help you with wealth and sons, and make for you gardens, and make for you rivers.

53
‫فعل‪ /‬فعل األمر‬ ‫املُضارِغ‪ /‬املاض‬ ‫الضمي‬

‫أ َْر َسلْنَاّ‬ ‫املاض ّ‬ ‫َنن ّ‬

‫‪54‬‬
55
CHAPTER THREE
Ten Forms

Overview
In this module there is a preparation and proficiency section which are both required while
the mastery section is only highly recommended to finish. Within the preparation section we
will introduce you to the 10 Forms. The 10 Forms are arguably the most important topic to
understand and grasp Arabic. The 10 Forms are everywhere from classical texts to the most
modern ones. As usual, after completing the required readings and videos you will be given
exercises within ‫ني‬
ّ ‫القصصّالنبي‬, hadith, and dua. After completing all the required parts you
will be asked to do a reading comprehension exercise within ‫ القصصّالنبيني‬along with
enrichment exercises from selected hadith. Lastly, in order to obtain the level of mastery
attempt to complete a dua, the prayer of intention by Imam al-Haddad.

If you are able to complete all of this not only will you have mastered the parts of Arabic
speech but you will also have added a wealth of knowledge from the stories of Prophet
Ibrahim, hadiths of the Prophet Muhammad, and duas!

56
Reading 3.1 | The Ten Forms
The Ten Forms in Arabic represent the different ways in which the meaning of a base verb
can be modified through the addition of vowels or letters. It is conceptually similar to the
way suffixes and prefixes impact meanings in English, such as create, recreate, uncreate.

The charts below are arranged to show all of the derivative verbal and nominal patterns
which come from Arabic roots. The right half of the charts represents the verbal patterns
from these roots which is separated into the three tenses. The left half represents the
nominal patterns, which is separated into the masdar¸the Ism al-Fā’il, and the Ism al-Maf’ūl.
The masdar is something similar to the gerand or infinitive form of verbs in English, such as
“running”, or “to run.” The Ism al-Fā’il is the active participle, or the one who does an
action, such as runner or writer. The Ism al-Maf’ūl is the passive participles, or that which
receives an action, such as learned or taught. In addition all of the past and present tense
verbs are in the ‫ ه ّو‬conjugation.

Note that all base verbs do not necessarily have to be on all of the Ten Forms patterns. It is
not necessary for a verbal root to have a Form 2 meaning, a Form 4 meaning, etc.
Additionally, the meanings below are the most common meanings, and not necessarily all
comprehensive. There may be a few verbs you come across whose meanings do not match
what is below.

Form 1

This is the base form of a verb which is represented by different three letter combinations
which give their own unique meanings. The only way to know the meaning of a Form 1
verb is to look it up or ask someone. Note that the 6 abwāb only apply to this form.

Ism al-Maf’ūl Ism al-Fā’il Masdar Command Present Past

ّ‫َّم ّْف ّعُّْول‬ ِّ َ‫ّف‬

‫اع ّل‬ --- ّ‫اِفْ َعِ ْلّ ّاُفّْ ّعُ ّْل‬ ِ
ُ‫يَ ْفّ َعُّ ّل‬ ّ‫فََِّعُّ َل‬
This form does not have a regular masdar pattern, it must be looked up for every new verb
and memorized. There may be a few common patterns that many Form 1 masdars occur on,
but nonetheless the masdar cannot be predicted by just looking at the form itself.

Form 2

This form has two common meanings: causation of Form 1, or intensification of Form 1.
Causation may is implied directly, or through continuous or repetitive action, such as
knowing and teaching. Intensification may occur through either increasing number of
occurrences of the action, or increasing the strength of an action.

57
Causing Form 1: ّ‫‘ َّعّلِ َم‬to know’ -- ‫‘ َّعّلَّ َّم‬to teach’
Intensification of Form 1: ‫س ّر‬
ََّ ‫‘ َّك‬to break’ -- ‫سَّر‬َّّ ‫‘ َّك‬to shatter’

Ism al-Maf’ūl Ism al-Fā’il Masdar Command Present Past

‫ُم َعلَّم‬ ‫ُم َعلِم‬ ‫تَ ْعلِْيم‬ ‫َعلِ ّْم‬ ّ‫يُ َعلِ ُم‬ ‫َعلَّ َّم‬
‫ُم َك َّسر‬ ‫ُم َك ِسر‬ ِ ‫تَك‬
‫ْس ّْري‬ ‫َك ِس ّْر‬ ‫يُ َك ِس ُّر‬ ‫َك َّسَّر‬

Form 3

This form implies two things. The first is that two parties are involved in the Form 1 action,
and the second is that emphasis is being placed on one of these parties. As such, it is
common that the emphasized party will be the doer of this verb and the party receiving the
action will be the direct object.

ّ‫‘ َج َه َد‬to struggle, to exert effort’ -- ‫اه َّد‬

َ ‫‘ َج‬to struggle, exert effort against something’
Ism al-Maf’ūl Ism al-Fā’il Masdar Command Present Past

‫اه ّد‬ ِ ‫ُُم‬ ‫ِج َهاد‬ ِ‫ج‬ ِ ‫َُي‬

َ َ‫ُُم‬ ‫اه ّد‬َ ‫اه َدّة‬
َ َ‫ُُم‬ ‫اه ّْد‬ َ ‫اه ُّد‬َ ‫اه َّد‬
َ ‫َج‬
Note that both of the Form 3 masdar patterns are commonly used.

Form 4

The meaning of this form is similar to Form 2, causation of Form 1, except that this form
implies a more direct type of causation. This means that the action is done at once, and then
it is completed.

ّ‫‘ َعلِ َم‬to know’ -- ‫‘ أ َْعلَ َّم‬to inform’

Ism al-Maf’ūl Ism al-Fā’il Masdar Command Present Past

‫ُم ْعلَم‬ ‫ُم ْعلِم‬ ‫إِ ْع َالم‬ ‫أ َْعلِ ّْم‬ ّ‫يُ ْعلِ ُم‬ ‫أ َْعلَ َّم‬
Compare the causative meanings of Forms 2 and 4 for this root. Both verbs mean to cause
knowledge, but note that the Form 2 (to teach) is causing knowledge in a different fashion,

58
meaning over a long period of time and in a repetitive fashion, whereas the Form 4 (to
inform) is a direct, one-time action.

Note that this form always uses the ‫القطع‬ ‫ مهزة‬in the past tense, command, and
masdar.

Form 5

The meaning of Form 5 is the result of Form 2. It is speaking about the same action as
Form 2 verbs, but from the perspective of one who is receiving the Form 2 action.

ّ‫‘ َعلَّ َم‬to teach’ -- ‫‘ تَ َعلَّ َّم‬to learn’

Ism al-Maf’ūl Ism al-Fā’il Masdar Command Present Past

‫ُمتَ َعلَّم‬ ‫ُمتَ َعلِم‬ ‫تَ َعلُّم‬ ّ‫تَ َعلَّ ْم‬ ّ‫يَتَ َعلَّ ُم‬ ّ‫تَ َعلَّ َم‬

Form 6

Form 6 is very similar to Form 3; both express two sides sharing in one action. However,
while the Form 3 verb puts an emphasis on one of the parties Form 6 entails free sharing in
the action without putting an emphasis on one side in particular. ّ

ّ‫‘ َِب َد َل‬to exchange with someone something’ -- ‫‘ تَّبَ َاد َّل‬to exchange freely’

Ism al-Maf’ūl Ism al-Fā’il Masdar Command Present Past

‫ُمتَ بَ َادل‬ ‫ُمتَ بَ ِادل‬ ‫ادل‬

ُ َ‫تَب‬ ّْ‫تَبَ َادل‬ ّ‫يَتَ بَ َاد ُل‬ ّ‫تَبَ َاد َل‬

The Form 6 verb given above may be used, to express the way that words, ideas, and
greetings are exchanged, meaning, without emphasis on one party in particular. For
example, Zaid exchanged his goods with ‘Amr (Form 3) vs. Zaid and ‘Amr exchanged goods (Form 6).

Form 7

The Form 7 gives the passive meaning of Form 1. This form is one of the rarer forms
because many verbs can be put into a passive form by simply changing the voweling.

59
ّ‫‘ َك َسَر‬to break’ -- ّ‫‘ اِنْ َك َسَر‬to be broken’

Ism al-Maf’ūl Ism al-Fā’il Masdar Command Present Past

‫ُمْن َك َسر‬ ‫ُمْن َك ِسر‬ ‫اِنْ ِك َسا ّر‬ ‫اِنْ َك ِس ّْر‬ ّ‫يَْن َك ِس ُر‬ ‫اِنْ َك َسَّر‬
Note that the ‘Ism al-Maf’ūl pattern of this verb is theoretical possibly but is logically
incoherent.

Form 8

This form means the reflexive action of the Form 1. Reflexive means that the action is done
to the one doing the action, whether it is a person or a group.

ّ‫‘ َمجَ َع‬to gather something’ -- ‫‘ اِ ْجتَ َم َّع‬to gather together’, as in the way a group ‘gathers
together’
ّ‫س‬ َّ ‫‘ اِ ْح َََت‬to be on one’s guard, to be wary’
َ ‫‘ َحَر‬to guard, watch something’ -- ‫س‬
Ism al-Maf’ūl Ism al-Fā’il Masdar Command Present Past

ّ‫ُُْمتَ َمع‬ ّ‫ُُْمتَ ِمع‬ ‫اِ ْجتِ َماع‬ ّ‫اِ ْجتَ ِم ْع‬ ّ‫ََْيتَ ِم ُع‬ ّ‫اِ ْجتَ َم َع‬
‫ُْحم َََتس‬ ‫ُْحم ََِتس‬ ّ ‫اِ ْحِ ََتا‬
‫س‬ ّْ ‫اِ ْح ََِت‬
‫س‬ ُّ ‫ََْي ََِت‬
‫س‬ َّ ‫اِ ْح َََت‬
‫س‬

Form 9

This form is used to express colors and physical defects. This form has many unusual
aspects in its patterns, and is very rare to come across. Almost any color can be applied to
this form but physical defects less so.

ْ ‫‘ أ‬red’ -- ‫‘ اِ ْحََّّر‬to be red’

‫َحَر‬
‫‘ أ َْع َور‬one-eyed’ -- ‫‘ اِ ْع َوَّّر‬to be one-eyed’

Ism al-Maf’ūl Ism al-Fā’il Masdar Command Present Past

ّ‫ُْحم َمر‬ ّ‫ُْحم َمر‬ ‫حَرا ّر‬ِْ ِ‫ا‬ ‫اِ ْحََّّر‬ ّ‫ََْي َم ُّر‬ ‫اِ ْحََّّر‬
ّ‫ُم ْع َور‬ ّ‫ُم ْع َور‬ ‫اِ ْع ِوَرا ّر‬ ‫اِ ْع َوَّّر‬ ‫يَ ْع َوُّّر‬ ‫اِ ْع َوَّّر‬
60
Note that the past tense and the command tense are the same, as well as the ‘Ism al-Fā’il and
the ‘Ism al-Maf’ūl. Also note that though the ‘Ism al-Fā’il and ‘Ism al-Maf’ūl end on a shadda
(which is a combination of two of the same letters back to back) they still need to take a
short vowel on top of the shadda (which depends on their grammatical role in a sentence).

Form 10

This form means to seek the action of Form 1, or to believe in the action of Form 1. It may
help to understand the second meaning by stating it as, “To deem something as such and
such.”

Seeking Form 1: ّ‫‘ َغ َفَر‬to forgive someone’ -- ‫‘ اِ ْستَ ْغ َفَّر‬to seek forgiveness from or of
someone’
ّ‫صغَُر‬ ِ
Believing Form 1: َ ‘to be small, little’ -- ‫صغََّر‬
ْ َ‫‘ ا ْست‬to deem something small, to belittle’
Ism al-Maf’ūl Ism al-Fā’il Masdar Command Present Past

ّ‫ُم ْستَ ْغ َفر‬ ّ‫ُم ْستَ ْغ ِفر‬ ّ‫اِ ْستِ ْغ َفار‬ ّ‫اِ ْستَ ْغ ِف ْر‬ ّ‫يَ ْستَ ْغ ِف ُر‬ ّ‫اِ ْستَ ْغ َفَر‬
ّ‫صغَر‬ ّ‫صغِر‬ ِ ِ ‫صغِ ّْر‬ ِ ّ‫صغِ ُر‬ ِ
ْ َ‫ُم ْست‬ ْ َ‫ُم ْست‬ ‫صغَار‬ْ ‫ا ْست‬ ْ َ‫ا ْست‬ ْ َ‫يَ ْست‬ ‫صغََّر‬ ْ َ‫ا ْست‬
Memorization Tips

There is no way around it… the Ten Forms are absolutely critical to a student’s knowledge
of Arabic and must be fully memorized. The following tips may help in this endeavor:

• Use the specific verbs given above and memorize them across, from right to left, as rows
rather than trying to memorize different parts of different verbs outside of context. It may
help to write these verbs out over and over again, along with pronouncing them aloud whilst
writing.

• Along with this, it’s a good idea to try to get used to the natural rhyme or “music” of the
forms themselves so that one is not dependent solely on memorized examples but can
identify based on the way a word sounds. This is best done by repeating the verbs aloud,
and eventually expanding ones knowledge of different verbs on the same given form.

• Make flashcard piles whenever any verbs are found on the different forms, and see how they
are used in different contexts. Organize them in piles according to the form number, and
implement them regularly so that the meanings are cemented and can be easily recalled.

• Study with your friends and peers. Practicing together and quizzing each other is a great way
to learn and memorize.

61
‫‪Exercise 3.1 | Forms 1 and 2‬‬

‫‪Instructions | Please fill in the following tables for Forms 1 and 2, using the roots‬‬
‫‪provided for both forms.‬‬

‫)علم ‪ْ (which is on the bab of‬سع‬

‫الفعلّ‬ ‫الفعلّ‬ ‫الفعلّ‬
‫اسمّالفاع ّل اسمّاملفعول‬ ‫املصد ّر‬
‫األمر‬ ‫ع‬
‫املضارّ‬ ‫املاض ّي‬
‫َِْس َّع‬ ‫‪Form 1‬‬

‫‪Form 2‬‬

‫)ضرب ‪ (which is on the bab of‬غلب‬

‫‪Form 2‬‬

‫)كرم ‪ (which is on the bab of‬حرم‬

‫‪Form 2‬‬

‫‪62‬‬
Exercise 3.2 | Forms 3 and 4

Instructions | Please fill in the following table for Forms 3 and 4, using the roots ‫ بدل‬for
both forms.

ّ‫الفعل‬ ّ‫الفعل‬ ّ‫الفعل‬

‫اسمّالفاع ّل اسمّاملفعول‬ ‫املصد ّر‬
‫األمر‬ ‫ع‬
ّ‫املضار‬ ‫املاض ّي‬
Form 3

Form 4

63
Exercise 3.3 | Forms 5 and 6
Instructions | Please fill in the following table for Forms 5 and 6, using the roots ‫ سرع‬for
both forms.

ّ‫الفعل‬
‫اسمّاملفعول‬ ‫اسمّالفاعل‬ ‫املصدر‬ ‫الفعلّاألمر‬ ‫الفعلّاملاضي‬
‫املضارع‬

Form 5

Form 6

64
Exercise 3.4 | Forms 7 and 8
Instructions | Please fill in the following table for Forms 7 and 8, using the roots ‫ قسم‬for
both forms.

ّ‫الفعل‬ ّ‫الفعل‬ ّ‫الفعل‬

‫اسمّالفاع ّل اسمّاملفعول‬ ‫املصد ّر‬
‫األمر‬ ‫ع‬
ّ‫املضار‬ ‫املاض ّي‬
Form 7

Form 8

65
Exercise 3.5 | Forms 9 and 10

Instructions | Please fill in the following table for Forms 9 and 10, using the roots ‫ حر‬for

form 9, andّ ‫ فهم‬for form 10.

ّ‫الفعل‬ ّ‫الفعل‬ ّ‫الفعل‬

‫اسمّالفاع ّل اسمّاملفعول‬ ‫املصد ّر‬
‫األمر‬ ‫ع‬
ّ‫املضار‬ ‫املاض ّي‬
Form 9

Form 10

66
‫‪Exercise 3.6 | The Ten Forms‬‬
‫‪Instructions | Complete the following table on the Ten Forms. The first example has‬‬
‫‪already been done for you.‬‬

‫األمر‬ ‫ال مضارع‬ ‫املاضي‬ ‫‪Form‬‬

‫اِ ْْسَ ّْع‬ ‫يَ ْس َم ُعّ‬ ‫َِْس َّع‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ِ‬
‫يُ َك ّبُ‬
‫ف‬ ‫صِ‬
‫اح ّْ‬ ‫َ‬
‫يُْرِسلُّ‬
‫تَ َدثََّرّ‬
‫يَتَ َز َام ُنّ‬
‫اِنْ َك ِس ّْر‬
‫سّ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫يَ ْلتَب ُ‬
‫ص َف َّّر‬‫ِ‬
‫اْ‬
‫يَ َستَكِْبُو َنّ‬

‫اسم املفعول‬ ‫اسم الفاعل‬ ‫املصدر‬ ‫‪Form‬‬

‫بّ‬
‫نَ ْد ٌ‬
‫ُم َك ِسر‬
‫ُم َع َاملّ‬
‫ُمْن ِزلّ‬
‫تَ َشغُّلّ‬
‫ُمتَ َقاتِلّ‬
‫ُمْن َقطَعّ‬
‫ُمُْتَ ِمعّ‬
‫اِْزِرقَاق‬

‫‪67‬‬
Instructions | Identify the form and pattern of the words below. The first example has
already been done for you.

Form Patten Word

2 ‫اسمّالفاع ّل‬ ّ‫ُم َكِب‬

ّ‫اِ ْستَّ ْف َه َم‬
ّ‫َم ْقبُ ْول‬
‫ُمثْ ِمر‬
‫تَبَدُّل‬
ّ‫صا ِرع‬ َ ‫ُم‬
‫يَْن َس ِج ُّم‬
‫حَرا ّر‬ِْ ِ‫ا‬
‫اِْرتَِف ّْع‬
‫اجد‬ ِ‫س‬
َ
‫تَ ْر ِغيب‬
‫إِقْبَال‬
ّ‫يَ ْعتَ ِذ ُر‬
‫صغَّر‬ َ ‫ُم‬
‫ُمتَ بَ ِادل‬
ّ‫ُم ْستَ ْش ِهد‬
ّ‫ُم ْعتَ َمد‬
ّ‫ُم ْعَرب‬

68
Reading Comprehension #3 | Prophet Ibrahim

Instructions | Answer the following questions from Prophet Ibrahim Sections 6-8. You
may only use the book and the list of vocabulary words listed below as an aid.

The questions are arranged by section, hence please scan the entire section in order to locate
exactly where the question is being asked.

Answer the questions on separate sheets of paper or on this document and send it back to
the course via the instructions posted in the assignment link.

ّ‫أَها َن‬- to insult/ revile ‫ – لَ َّما‬when

‫ – عِقاب‬punishment َّ – to disappear
‫غاب‬
‫ – َجزاء‬penalty َّ ‫ – َد َه‬to be amazed
‫ش‬
َّ ‫ َحَّر‬- to burn
‫ق‬ ‫ – ال َق َمر‬the moon
َّ ‫ – أ َْو‬to light a fire
‫قد‬ ‫ – طَلَ َّع‬to rise
‫ – أَلْ َقى‬to throw ّ‫– ِبق‬remaining
‫ّّكون‬-be for me… ّ‫ب‬
َ َ‫ – غَل‬to overpower/ overcome
‫ – َم ْس ُرور‬to be pleased ‫الصْبح‬
ُ – the morning
َّ ‫ – َد ِه‬to be baffled/ shocked
‫ش‬ ‫ – الغَيم‬clouds
‫ – ََتَََّّري‬to be baffled/ confused ‫ص َّر‬
َ َ‫ – ن‬to triumph
ّ‫ – َكوكبا‬stars ‫ – َخليل‬a friend

69
Section 6

6. What did the people decide as a punishment for Ibrahim?

7. What happened when they threw Ibrahim? Be specific.

8. What were the people's reaction?

Section 7

5. Name the things Ibrahim thought was his lord until he reached a conclusion.

6. What was his conclusion? What were the reasons behind it?

Section 8

5. What were the two things Allah made Ibrahim?

6. What did Allah command Ibrahim to do?

70
Translation #3 | Prophet Ibrahim
Instructions | Read Sections 6-8 of Prophet Ibrahim and then translate with the given
words below.

Words:

ّ‫أَها َن‬- to insult/ revile ‫ – لَ َّما‬when

‫ – عِقاب‬punishment َّ – to disappear
‫غاب‬
‫ – َجزاء‬penalty َّ ‫ – َد َه‬to be amazed
‫ش‬
َّ ‫ َحَّر‬- to burn
‫ق‬ ‫ – ال َق َمر‬the moon
َّ ‫ – أ َْو‬to light a fire
‫قد‬ ‫ – طَلَ َّع‬to rise
‫ – أَلْ َقى‬to throw ّ‫– ِبق‬remaining
‫ّّكون‬-be for me… ّ‫ب‬
َ َ‫ – غَل‬to overpower/ overcome
‫ – َم ْس ُرور‬to be pleased ‫الصْبح‬
ُ – the morning
َّ ‫ – َد ِه‬to be baffled/ shocked
‫ش‬ ‫ – الغَيم‬clouds
ّ‫ – ََتَََّري‬to be baffled/ confused ّ‫ص َر‬
َ َ‫ – ن‬to triumph
ّ‫ – َكوكبا‬stars ‫ – َخليل‬a friend

71
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

72
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

73
Apply #4 | Identifying Verbs and their Bab
Instructions | Read Sections 6-8 of Prophet Ibrahim. Then complete the following table on
identifying the verb, its pattern, and its form. A few examples have already been done for
you.

Form Pattern ‫الفعل‬

8 ‫ض‬
ّ ‫فعلّاملا‬ ‫اِ ْجتَ َم َّع‬

74
75
Apply #5 | The Ten Forms in Ahādith
Instructions | Circle the verbs and verb-related ‘isms from the Ten Forms table in the
following hadīth passages, and identify which forms and patterns they are on.

ِ َ ‫َّثّ َك َذ‬ ِ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬

ّ‫ف‬
َّ َ‫َخل‬
ْ ‫اّو َع َدّأ‬
َ َ‫ب َّوّإذ‬ َ َ‫ آيَةُّال ُمنَاف ِقّإِذ‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬
َ ‫اّحد‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
The signs of an impostor: if he speaks, he lies, and if he makes a promise, he breaks it.ّّ

‫ّج ّائِّر‬ ِ ِ َ َ‫ أَفْضلّاجلِه ِادّمنّق‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬

َ ‫ّسلْطَان‬
ُ ‫ّحقّعنْ َد‬
َ َ‫الّ َكل َمة‬ َْ َ َُ ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
The most virtuous struggle is when on speaks a word of truth before an unjust ruler.

ّ‫ك‬ ِ ‫ إِذَاّطَبختّمرقَةّفَأَ ْكثِرّمائَهاّوّتَعاه ْد‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬

َّ َ‫ّج َْريان‬ ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
ََ َ َ َ ْ ََ َ ْ َ
When you prepare some broth (soup), add more water and be thoughtful of your neighbors.

ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬
ُ ‫ إِ َّنّال ُم ْستَ َش ُار‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬
ّ‫ّم ْؤّتَ َم ٌن‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
The consultant is placed in a position of trust.

ّ
ِ ‫ منّاِحتَ بسّفَرسا ِّيفّسبِ ِيلّهللاِّإِي مانّ ِِبللِّوّتَص ِديقاّبِو ْع ِدهِّفَِإ َّن‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬
ُّ‫ّشبَ َعهُ َّوّ ِريَّه‬ ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
َ ْ َ َ َ َ َ َ ْ َْ
ِ ‫وّروثَهّوّبولَه ِّيفّ ِميزانِِهّيوم‬
‫ّالقيَ َام ِّة‬ ََ َ ُ َ ُ ََ
Whoever rears a horse for the sake of Allāh, with faith in Allāh and trust in His promise,
then its food, drink, dung, and urine will be in his scale on the Day of Judgment (as good
deeds).

‫فّبِغَ ِريّهللاِّفَ َق ْدّأَ ْشَرَّك‬

َّ َ‫ّحل‬ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬
َ ‫ َم ْن‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
Whoever swears an oath by other than Allāh has ascribed partners with Allāh.

76
ّ: ‫الّﷺ‬
َ َ‫ّخريٌّ؟ّق‬ ُّ ‫ّأ‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬
َ ‫َيّا ِإل ْس َالِم‬ َ ‫ّسأ ََل َّر ُس‬ َّ ‫اصّأ‬
َ ‫َن َّر ُجال‬ َ ‫ّع ْمروّبِ َن‬
ِ ‫ّالع‬ ِ ِ ‫عن‬
َ ‫ّعْبدّهللاّبْ ِن‬َ َْ
ْ ‫ت َّو َّم ْنّ َلّْتَ ْع ِر‬ ِ
ّّّ‫ف‬ َ ْ‫ّعَرف‬
َ ‫ىّم ْن‬
َ َ‫ّعل‬ َ ‫تُطْع ُمّالطََّع َامّوّتَ ْقَرأ‬
َ ‫ُّالس َال َم‬
On (the authority of) ‘Abd Allāh ibn ‘Amr ibn al-‘Ās, that a man asked the Messenger of
Allāh (peace be upon him), “Which (part of) Islam is best?”ّHe (The Prophet, peace be
upon him) said, “Feeding food and saying ‘peace’ upon whom you know and whom you do
not know.”

ّ‫ّسلِ َمّال ُم ْسلِ ُمو َن ِّم ْن‬ ِ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬

َ ‫ولّهللاّﷺّال ُم ْسل ُم َّم ْن‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ّق‬:ّ‫ال‬ َ َ‫اصّق‬ َ ّ‫ّع ْمروّبِ َن‬
ِ ‫الع‬ ِ ِ ‫عن‬
َ ‫ّعْبدّاّللّبْ ِن‬ َ َْ
ُّّ‫ّعْنه‬ ِ ِ ِِ ِ
َ ُ‫ّه َجَر َّماّنَ َهىّهللا‬
َ ‫ل َسانه َّوّيَ َديه َّوّال ُم َهاج ُر َّم ْن‬
Abd Allāh ‘ibn ‘Amr ‘ibn al-‘Ās (he) said, the Messenger of Allāh (peace be upon him) said,
“The Muslim is the one whom other Muslims are safe from his tongue and his hands, And
the emigrant is the one who left that which Allāh forbade.

ِ ِ ِ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬
ُ‫ورتَهُ َّو َّم ْنّا ْعتَ َذ َرّإِ َىلّهللاّقَبِ َلّهللاُّعُ ّْذ َرّه‬
َ ‫ّهللاّع‬
َ ‫ّسَََت‬َ ُ‫ّخَز َنّل َسانَه‬
َ ‫ َم ْن‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
Whoever guards his tongue, Allāh will conceal his faults, and whoever apologizes to Allāh
(beseeching His forgiveness), Allāh will accept his apology.

َّ ّ‫ولّقَائِلُ ُه ّْم‬
َّ ‫اّخَر ُجواّإِ َىلّال َم َقاّبِ ِرّأَ ْنّيَ ُق‬ ِ
‫ّعلَْي ُك ّْم‬َ ُ‫الس َالم‬ َ ‫َِّبّﷺّيُ َعل ُم ُه ْمّإِ َذ‬
ُّ ِ‫ّّ َكا َنّالن‬:ّ‫ال‬
َّ َ‫ع ٌَّ ّْنّبَُريْ َد َةّق‬
َ‫اّوّلَ ُك ْمّالْ َعافِيَّة‬
َّ َ‫هللاَّلَن‬
ّ ّ‫َسأ َُل‬ ِ ّ ّ‫ّشاء‬
ْ ‫هللاُّلََالح ُقو َنّأ‬ ِ ِ ّ ‫ني‬
َ َ ‫ّوّإنَّّإ ْن‬
ِ ِ ّ ‫ّالدّي ِر ِّمنّالْم ْؤِمنِني‬
َ َ ‫ّوّالْ ُم ْسلم‬َ َ ُ ْ َ ‫أ َْه َل‬
ِ
On (the authority of) Buraida (he) said: The Prophet (peace be upon him) used to teach
them that if they left towards a graveyard that a speaker amongst them should say, “Peace be
upon you, O people of the abodes from amongst the believers and Muslims! We, if Allāh
wills, are surely following (you). I ask Allāh for safety for us and for you.”

77
Mastery #3 | Dua
Instructions | Please identify the words below which derive from the 10 forms, and fill in
the blanks with your own translation.

The Prayer of Intention by Imam al-Haddad

In the name of God, the All-Merciful, the

ّ‫ّالرِحي ِم‬ ِ ِ
Benevolent
َ ‫ح ِن‬ َ ‫بس ِمّهللا‬
ّْ ‫ّالر‬

I have intended to learn and to teach, and to

ِ ِ
remember and to remind, and the benefit ّ‫ّو‬
َ ‫ّوّالتَذْك َري‬َ ‫ّوّالتَ َذ ُّكَر‬ َ ‫تّالتَ َعلُّ َم‬
َ ‫ّوّالتَ ْعل َيم‬ ُ ْ‫نَ َوي‬
ِ‫اعّوّا ِإلفادةَّوّا ِإلستِفادّة‬ ِ ِ ‫النَ ْفع‬
َ َّ ‫ّوّاالنْت َف‬
and give benefit, and to reap benefit and give
benefit. َ ْ َ ََ

And to encourage to hold fast by the Book

of God, and the tradition of His Messenger, ِّ‫ّسنَّةِ َّر ُسولِه‬
ُ ‫ّو‬
ِ ِ ِِ ِ
َ ‫ّعلَىّالتَ َم ُّسكّبكتَابّهللا‬
َ ‫ث‬َّ َ‫َوّاحل‬
God bless him and give him peace.

ّ‫ّالدَاللَةَّ َعلَىّاخلَ ِري‬

َ ‫ىّو‬ ِ ُ ‫و‬
And calling to the truth, and directing
َ ‫ّالد َعاّإ َىلّاَلَُد‬ َ
towards good.

ِ‫ضاتِهِّوّقُربِهِّوّثَوابِّه‬ ِ ِ ‫اِبتِغَاء‬
Seeking the countenance of God, and His
َ َ ْ َ َ ‫ّم ْر‬ َ ‫ّو ْجهّهللا َّو‬
ََ ْ
pleasure, His proximity, and His reward.

Glorious and transcendent is He. ّ‫اىل‬

َ ‫ّوّتَ َع‬
َ ُ‫ُسْب َحانَه‬

78
CHAPTER FOUR
Hans Wehr and Pronouns

Overview
In this module there is a preparation and proficiency section which are both required while
the mastery section is only highly recommended to finish. Within the preparation section we
will introduce you to Hans Wehr and Pronouns. The Hans Wehr dictionary is known to be
the best tool to have for beginning and advanced students. It is something that you will need
for the rest of your life as a student of Arabic so make sure to study this section well. As
usual, after completing the required readings and videos you will be given exercises within
‫القصصّالنبيني‬, Qur'an, and dua. After completing all the required parts you will be asked to
do a reading comprehension exercise within ‫ القصصّالنبيني‬along with enrichment exercises
from a selected dua. Lastly, in order to obtain the level of mastery attempt to complete an
exercise from Sūra Ash-Shu'ara.

If you are able to complete all of this not only will you have mastered the parts of Arabic
speech but you will also have added a wealth of knowledge from the stories of Prophet
Ibrahim, Sūra Ash-Shu'ara, and duas!

79
Reading 4.1 | Hans Wehr Sample Entry
In this section you will be taught how to use the Hans Wehr dictionary. This is, if not the
most important tool, a tool that will benefit you throughout your journey whether you are an
advanced or beginner student. It is named after the German Arabist, Hans Wehr who first
published this book in German in 1952. J. Milton Cowan then translated it into the book we
now have today for English speakers. The dictionary is known for its conciseness and its
systematic methodology for organizing the book by root letters and their 10 forms. Below is
a sample entry that indicates how it is organized.

Indicates the past tense, present tense,

and masdar. The past tense is always
transliterated. Besides it will be a letter, Major
either u, i, or a. This indicates the vowel Definition
on the middle root letter in the present s of Form
tense form where u=dhamma i=kasra
1
a=fatha. In this example we would know
ّ‫ َح ُس َن‬is on bab ‫ّ َك ُرَّم‬since its present tense
form is ‫ن‬ ُّ ‫ ََْي ُس‬. The masdar form is in the
parenthesis.

(‫ ه‬s.th.) - This
indicates that the
verb takes a direct
object

(‫ ه ل‬s.th. to s.o.) Higher

This indicates forms are
that the verb uses indicated
prepositions to by Roman
give certain numerals
meanings. It will
always begin with
the specific
preposition such
as ‫ب‬, ‫ل‬,...

80
Words related to the root Form 1 Masdars
Note that not all Ten Forms exist for every verb

81
Masdars and related words from Forms 2-10 Words related to the root
Exercise 4.1 | Hans Wehr
Instructions | Using the following entries from the Hans Wehr dictionary, answer the
questions below.

1. How many bab’s are possible with this root? Write it/them out in Arabic, including
the past, present, and command tense conjugations.

2. What is the meaning of the most common masdar for this root?

3. Translate the sentence, “I landed with a thud on the earth (‫ ”)األرض‬into Arabic.

82
1. What are the form 1 bab and most common masdar for this root? Please write it out
in Arabic, including past, present, and command tense conjugations.

2. How many forms exist for this root? List them all out.

3. Translate the sentence, “Zaid held his own against ‘Amir (‫ ”)عامر‬into Arabic.

83
Reading 4.2| Pronouns
Pronouns in the Arabic language are ‘isms which do not follow some of the conventional
rules of ‘isms. For example, they do not take a tanwīn or the definite article (alif lām).
Furthermore, they are used to refer back to something already mentioned and hence do not
have an inherent meaning outside of this connection. They also have detached (‫ )املنفصل‬and
ِ ‫)املت‬. When pronouns are attached to ‘isms they form an idafa, but if they
attached forms (‫َّصل‬
ُ
are attached to verbs they become maf’ul bihi (direct object).

Attached Form Detached Form Meanings

When this
is attached ‫ّْي‬ ّ‫أَ َن‬ “I”

Person
First
to a verb an
extra nun is ‫نَا‬ ‫ََْن ُّن‬ “We” (dual or plu.)
added
before the َّ
‫ك‬ َّ ْ‫أَن‬
‫ت‬ “You” (masc. sing.)
ya’. ‫ُك َمّا‬ ّ‫أَنْتُ َما‬ “You” (masc. dual)

Second Person
‫ُك ّْم‬ ‫أَنْتُ ّْم‬ “You” (masc. plu.)

ِّ
‫ك‬ ِّ ْ‫أَن‬
‫ت‬ “You” (fem. sing.)

‫ُك َمّا‬ ّ‫أَنْتُ َما‬ “You” (fem. dual)

‫ُك َّّن‬ َّّ ُ ْ‫أَن‬

‫ت‬ “You” (fem. plu.)

ُ‫ّه‬ ‫ُه َّو‬ “He” (masc. sing.)

‫ُه َما‬ ‫َُهَا‬ “They” (masc. dual)

Third Person

‫ُه ّْم‬ ‫ُه ّْم‬ “They” (masc. plu.)

‫َها‬ ‫ِه َّي‬ “She” (fem. sing.)

‫ُه َما‬ ‫َُهَا‬ “They” (fem. dual)

‫ُه َّّن‬ ‫ُه َّّن‬ “They” (fem. plu.)

Notes | The third person pronouns which begin with a damma may take a kasra in some
cases, such as if they are preceded by the letter ‫ ي‬or a kasra. Also, the attached form of ‫أ ّن‬,
which takes a sukoon, may take a fatha if it is preceded by an alif. Both cases are found in the
following lines:

‫خ ِلقّّ ُك لِ ِه ِّم‬ َّ ِ‫ّحّبِيّب‬

َّ ّ‫كّ َّخ ِّريّال‬ َّ ‫ّ َّعّلَى‬ ّ َ‫ص ِّلّ َّوّ َّسّلِ ّْمّ َّد ّائِماّّأَّب‬
‫دا‬ َّ ّ‫ي‬
َّ ‫وال‬
َّ ‫َّم‬
My Lord send blessings and peace always eternally upon your beloved, the best of creation entirely.

84
Exercise 4.2| Pronouns Activity
Instructions | Identify all of the attached and detached pronouns in the following section
of a poem by Ibn al-Fārid. Read from right to left, then down.

‫ّش ْغلِ ّْي‬

ُ ‫ّح ِديثِ ْي َّو‬
َ ‫أَنْتُ ْم‬ ّ ‫وض ْي َّوّنَ ْفلِ ّْي‬
ِ ‫أَنْتُمّفُر‬
ُ ْ
You are my speech and my work ّ You are my obligations and excess

‫ُصلِ ّي‬
َ ‫تّأ‬
ُ ‫اّوقَ ْف‬ ِ
َ ‫إ َذ‬ ‫ِت‬ِ َ ‫َّيّقِْب لَ ِت ِّيف‬
ّْ ‫ّص َال‬ ْ
Whenever I stand up to pray ّ O my orientation in my prayer

ّ‫تّ ُكلِ ْي‬ ِ

ُ ‫إِلَيه َّو َّج ْه‬ ّْ ِ ‫ّع‬
‫ين‬ َ‫ب‬ َ‫ص‬
ْ ُ‫َج َمالُ ُك ْمّن‬
To it I have turned all of myself ّ Your beauty is before my eye (soul)

‫ورّالتَ َجلِ ّي‬

ُ ُ‫بّط‬
ُ ْ‫َوّال َقل‬ ّْ ‫ّض ِم ِري‬
‫ي‬ ِ‫و‬
َ ‫ّسُّرُك ْم ِّيف‬ َ
And the heart is the mountain of disclousure ّ Your secret is in my inner being

85
Exercise 4.3 | Hans Wehr Exercise
Instructions | Use the Hans Wehr dictionary to answer the following questions.ّّ

If the word is derived from Forms 2 to 10,

Form Meaning of does the word’s meaning correspond to
Root number the word common meanings given in class? If so,
Word
letters 1 to 10 if according to explain.
applicable Hans Wehr Note: You may need to think a little creatively and
check what the Form 1 means.

‫ب‬
َّ ‫تَ َع َّر‬
‫تَ ْعبِري‬
‫اِ ْستِ ْع َمار‬
‫ُم َقاتِل‬
‫ف‬
ّ ‫ص‬ ِ ‫مْن‬
ُ

More challenging words.

If the word is derived from Forms 2 to 10,

Form
Meaning of does the word’s meaning correspond to
Root number
the word common meanings given in class? If so,
Word letter 1 to 10 if
according to explain.
s applicabl
Hans Wehr Note: You may need to think a little creatively and
e
check what the Form 1 means.

‫َمْن ِز ّل‬
‫ََْت ِديد‬
ّ ِ‫ُم ْرع‬
‫ب‬
‫ُم ْستََِّت‬
‫َكس ُف ْوْرد‬
ْ ‫أ‬

86
Even more challenging words.

If the word is derived from Forms 2 to 10,

ّ‫صيَّاد‬
َ
‫َمْيل‬
‫َسيَّ َارة‬
‫ُم ْستَعِ ّري‬
‫ح َدّة‬ ِّ َّ‫ُمّت‬
‫اِت َف َّق‬

Voweling | Please used the Hans Wehr Dictionary to look up the correct voweling of the
following words.

Roots
Form 1 past tense (voweled) Form 1 present tense (voweled)
(right to left)

‫عّقّل‬
‫دّنّ ّو‬
‫ش‬
ّ ّ‫رش‬
‫ق‬
ّ ّ‫شّر‬
(Option 1)
‫ق‬
ّ ّ‫شّر‬
(Option 2)

87
Preposition Usages | Use the Hans Wehr Dictionary to look up the correct prepositional
usage for the following verses of the Qur’ān, and translate the sentences.

1. ّ ‫ّعلَىّقُلُوَبِِ ّْم‬
﴾ َ ُ‫﴿ َختَ َمّهللا‬

ّ ‫ابّ ِِبحلَ ِّق‬

﴾ ِ َ َ‫﴿نَ َّزَلّعل‬
2. َ َ‫يكّالكت‬ َ

ِ ِ
3. ُ ‫﴿الَّذيّأَطْ َع َم ُه ْمّم ْن‬
﴾ّ‫ّجوع‬

ّ﴾‫لسيِئَِّة‬ ِ َ َ‫﴿يَستَ ْع ِجلُون‬

4.
َ ‫كِّب‬ ْ

5. ﴾ ِّ َ‫﴿اِنْطَلَ ْقتُ ْمّإِ َىلّال َمغ‬

ّ َ‫ان‬

88
Exercise 4.4| Pronouns Activity
Instructions | Combine the following words with pronouns in their attached form and
write the results into the table below. The first example has already been done for you.

Translation Result Pronoun Noun

Your book َّ ُ‫كِتَاب‬

‫ك‬ ّ‫أنت‬
َ ُّ ِ‫ك‬
‫تاب‬
‫َنن‬ ّ‫قَلَ ُم‬
ّ‫هن‬ ُ‫َدفْ ََّت‬
‫ه ّو‬ ‫َهاتِف‬
‫ه ّي‬ ُ‫َسيَّ َارّة‬
‫أنتما‬ ‫س‬
ُّ َ‫َم ْقب‬
‫هم‬ ُ‫طَا ِولَّة‬
‫أن‬ ُّ َ‫ل‬
‫وح‬
‫ه ّي‬ ّ‫عام‬
ُ َ‫ط‬
‫أن‬ ُّ ِ‫َحب‬
‫يب‬
‫َها‬ ‫ُكْر ِس ُّّي‬
‫هم‬ ‫َم ْق َع ُّد‬
‫َنن‬ ُ‫ُمكْتَ بَّة‬
ّ‫أنت‬ ُّ َ‫ب‬
‫يت‬
‫َها‬ ُ‫اع ّة‬
َ ‫ُش َج‬
ّ‫أنت‬
َ ُ‫نَظَّ َارّة‬
‫أنت ّم‬ ّ‫ال‬
ُ َ‫َمج‬
ّ‫هن‬ ُ‫ص َريّة‬ِ‫ب‬
َ
‫أن‬ ‫َم ْع َه ُّد‬

89
Reading Comprehension #4 | Prophet Ibrahim

Instructions | Answer the following questions from Prophet Ibrahim Section 9. You may
only use the book and the list of vocabulary words listed below as an aid. In addition, the
words you looked up in Hans Wehr from the previous exercise can be used as an aid.

Answer the questions on separate sheets of paper or on this document and send it back to
the course via the instructions posted in the assignment link.

‫ – إذ‬when
ّ‫ بَ ْل‬- nay/rather/no
‫ – يَ ْهدي ِّن‬He guides me*
ِّ ‫ – يَ ْسق‬He gives drink
‫ني‬
ِّ ‫ – يَ ْشف‬He cures me
‫ني‬
ِّ ‫ – َُيي‬He gives me life
‫ني‬

Section 9

1. What dua or call did Ibrahim make to Allah?

2. What were some of the questions Ibrahim asked his nation to try and
convince them?

3. What was there answer to why they worshiped the idols?

4. Name three characteristics Ibrahim mention about Allah.

90
Translation #4 | Prophet Ibrahim
Instructions | Read Section 9 of Prophet Ibrahim. Use the vocabulary list you looked up
from the Hans Wehr exercise to help aid you in translation. In addition there are a few
words given below.

Words:

• - Usually if we want to say "he guides me" we need to add a ‫ ن‬at the end of the word
ِّ ‫ يَ ْهدي‬there is no ‫ ن‬present. So what's happening? In the Qur'an if a verse
but in ‫ن‬

ends with a verb that has ‫ ن‬then the ‫ ي‬is dropped and a kasra is placed on the ‫ ن‬to

indicate that there was once a ‫ّن‬there.

91
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

92
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

93
Apply #6 | Hans Wehr and Pronoun

Instructions | In the chart use Hans Wehr to complete the following table on identifying
the root letters, its pattern, its form and the relationship between the meaning and the form

If the word is derived from Forms 2 to 10,

‫َدعّا‬

ّ‫َع ُد ٌو‬

‫يُطْعِ ُّم‬

‫ت‬ ْ ‫َم ِر‬

ُّ ‫ض‬

‫يت‬
ُّ ‫َُي‬

‫ت‬ ْ ‫َم ِر‬

ُّ ‫ض‬

94
Apply #7 | Hans Wehr and Pronoun in Prophet Ibrahim
Instructions | Read Section 9 of Prophet Ibrahim and identify all the pronouns whether
they be attached to a noun or verb along with its meaning.

Attached/Detached
Word Meaning
Pronoun

95
Mastery Exercise #4 | Analyzing Sūra Ash-Shu'ara'
Instructions | Identify every verb and command, its tense and the pronoun attached

ّ‫﴾ّإِن‬٣﴿ّ‫ني‬ ِ ِ ‫كّأََّالّي ُكونُو‬ ِ ‫ك‬ ِ ِ‫ابّالْ ُمب‬ِ َ‫تّالْ ِكت‬ َ ‫﴾ّتِْل‬١﴿ّ‫طسم‬

َ ‫اّم ْؤمن‬
ُ َ َ ‫ِّبخ ٌعّنَّ ْف َس‬ َ َ َّ‫﴾ّلَ َعل‬٢﴿ّ‫ني‬ ُ ‫ّآّي‬
َ ‫ك‬
َّ ‫نّذ ْكر ِّم َن‬ ِ ‫مّم‬ ِ ‫﴾ّوماَّيْتِي ِه‬ ِ ِ ‫ّالسم ِاءّآيةّفَظَلَّتّأ َْعنَاقُهمّ ََل‬ ِ
ّ‫ّالر ْحَ ِن‬ َ َ َّ ٤﴿ّ‫ني‬ َ ‫اّخاضع‬ َ َ ُْ ْ َ َ َّ ‫ّعلَْي ِهمّم َن‬ َ ‫َّشأّْنُنَ ِزْل‬
َ‫ن‬
ّ‫﴾ّأ ََوَلّْيََرْوا‬٦﴿ّ‫﴾ّفَ َق ْدّ َك َّذبُواّفَ َسيَأْتِي ِه ْمّأَنبَاءُ َّماّ َكانُواّبِِهّيَ ْستَ ْه ِزئُو َن‬٥﴿ّ‫ني‬ ِ ‫ُْحم َدثّإَِّالّ َكانُواّعْنه‬
َ ‫ّم ْع ِرض‬
َُُ
ِ ِ ُّ ‫ك ََّليةّّۖوماّ َكا َنّأَ ْكثَره‬ ِ ِ ِ
ّ﴾٨﴿ّ‫ني‬ َ ‫مّم ْؤمن‬ ُُ َ َ َ َ ‫﴾ّإِ َّن ِّيفّذَل‬٧﴿ّ‫ضّ َك ْمّأَنبَ تْ نَاّف َيهاّمنّ ُك ِل َّزْوجّ َك ِري‬ ْ ‫إِ َىل‬
ِ ‫ّاأل َْر‬
ِِ ِ ِ َّ ‫كّ ََلوّالْع ِزيز‬
ّ‫﴾ّقَ ْوَم‬١٠﴿ّ‫ني‬ َ ‫وسىّأ َِنّائْتّالَْق ْوَمّالظَّالم‬ َ ‫ّم‬ ُ‫ك‬ َ ُّ‫﴾ّوإِ ْذّ َن َدى َّرب‬َ ٩﴿ّ‫يم‬ ُ ‫ّالرح‬ ُ َ َُ َ َّ‫َوإِ َّن َّرب‬
ّ‫يّوَالّيَنطَلِ ُق‬َ ‫ّص ْد ِر‬ َ ‫يق‬
ِ
ُ ‫﴾ّويَض‬
ِ ِ
َ ١٢﴿ّ‫افّأَنّيُ َكذبُون‬ ُ ‫َخ‬ َّ ‫بّإِِنّأ‬ ِ ‫الّر‬
َ َ َ‫﴾ّق‬١١﴿ّ‫ف ْر َع ْو َنّّۚأََالّيَتَّ ُقو َن‬
ِ
ِ ُ‫افّأَنّي ْقتُل‬ ِ ِ
ّ‫الّ َك َّالّّۖفَا ْذ َهبَا‬
َ َ‫﴾ّق‬١٤﴿ّ‫ون‬ َ ُ ‫َخ‬ َ ‫نبّفَأ‬ ٌ َ‫ّعلَ َّيّذ‬ َ ‫﴾ّوََلُْم‬
َ ١٣﴿ّ‫ّه ُارو َن‬ َ ‫ل َس ِانّفَأ َْرس ْلّإِ َىل‬
ّ‫﴾ّأَ ْنّأ َْرِس ْل‬١٦﴿ّ‫ني‬ ِ ِ ‫ولّر‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ ُّ ‫ِِبّيتِنَاّّۖإِنَّّمع ُك‬
َ ‫بّالْ َعالَم‬ َ ‫﴾ّفَأْتيَاّف ْر َع ْو َنّفَ ُقّوَالّإن‬١٥﴿ّ‫مّم ْستَمعُو َن‬
َ ُ ‫َّّر ُس‬ ََ َ
ِِ ِ ِ ْ‫كّفِينَاّولِيداّولَبِث‬ ِ ِ
ّ‫ت‬ َ ْ‫﴾ّوفَ َعل‬
َ ١٨﴿ّ‫ني‬ َ ‫تّفينَاّم ْنّعُ ُم ِرَكّسن‬ َ َ َ َ ِ‫الّأََلّْنَُرب‬ َ َ‫﴾ّق‬١٧﴿ّ‫يل‬ َ ‫َم َعنَاّبَِنّإ ْسَرائ‬
ِ ِ ‫كّالَِّتّفَعلْتّوأ‬
ّ﴾ ّ ١٩﴿ّ‫ين‬ َ ‫َنتّم َنّالْ َكاف ِر‬
َ َ َ َ َ َ‫فَ ْعلَت‬
Translation (Arberry): Ta Sin Mim (1) Those are the signs of the Manifest Book. (2) Perchance thou
consumest thyself that they are not believers. (3) If We will, We shall send down on them out of heaven a
sign, so their necks will stay humbled to it. (4) But never fresh remembrance comes to them from the
All-merciful, except they turn away from it. (5) So they have cried lies; therefore assuredly tidings will
come to them of that they mocked at. (6) What, have they not regarded the earth, how many therein We
have caused to grow of every generous kind? (7) Surely in that is a sign, yet most of them are not
believers. (8) Surely thy Lord, He is the All-mighty, the All-compassionate. (9) And when thy Lord called
to Moses, 'Go to the people of the evildoers, (10) the people of Pharaoh; will they not be godfearing?'
(11) He said, 'My Lord, I fear they will cry me lies, (12) and my breast will be straitened, and my tongue
will not be loosed; so send to Aaron. (13) They also have a sin against me, and I fear they will slay me.'
(14) Said He, 'No indeed; but go, both of you, with Our signs, and We assuredly shall be with you,
listening. (15) So go you to Pharaoh, and say, "Verily, I am the Messenger of the Lord of all Being; (16)
so send forth with us the Children of Israel." (17) He said, 'Did we not raise thee amongst us as a child?
Didst thou not tarry among us years of thy life? (18) And thou didst the deed thou didst, being one of
the ungrateful!' (19)
ّ

‫ فعل األمر‬/‫فعل‬ ‫ املاض‬/‫املُضارِغ‬ ‫الضمي‬

ّ ّ

96
97
98
CHAPTER FIVE
The Signs of I'raab for Isms | ‫اإلعراب‬

Overview
Great work on getting this far! The rest of the course covers a distinguishing feature of the
Arabic language, ‘Irab, known as “declension” in Latin terminology. ‘Irab is changing the
sound of word endings because of what is happening to them in a sentence. Declension has
four grammatical states in the Arabic language that words switch between depending on
what is affecting them. The rest of the course explains what the states of declension are, how
declension is recognized, what affects it on a basic level.

In this module there is a preparation and proficiency section which are both required while
the mastery section is only highly recommended to finish. Within the preparation section we
will be focusing on the ‫ إعراب‬of nouns. These skills are extremely important as they will be
foundational tools for syntax. You will be introduced to the three states of declension, its
signs and cases where they are implicity. As usual, after completing the required readings and
videos you will be given exercises within ‫القصصّالنبيني‬, Qur'an, and dua. After completing all

the required parts you will be asked to do a reading comprehension exercise within ّ‫القصص‬
‫ النبيني‬along with enrichment exercises from a selected dua. Lastly, in order to obtain the level
of mastery attempt to complete an exercise from Sūra Al-Jumu`ah.

If you are able to complete all of this not only will you have mastered the parts of Arabic
speech but you will also have added a wealth of knowledge from the stories of Prophet
Ibrahim, Sūra Al-Jumu`ah, and duas!

99
Reading 5.1 | The States of ‫اإلعراب‬
This science of declension applies to most ‘isms and present tense verbs. Depending on
how these words are being impacted by other words in a sentence they will end on a certain
short vowel. ‘Isms do not have inherent grammatical states. Therefore, an ‘ism can only
be voweled once it is in a sentence, and this voweling can change depending on what it is
doing in the sentence.

The grammarians did various tests to see exactly how words changed depending on what
they were doing in a sentence. They noticed that if they took the same singular ‘ism and put
it in different sentences, its end voweling would change like this:

ُ ‫َسلَّ ْم‬
‫تّعلىّزي ّد‬ ّ‫ّيتّّزيدا‬
ُ َ‫َّرأ‬ ‫َجّاءَّّزي ٌّد‬

They noticed the same thing if they did this with ‘isms that were dual:

ِّ َ‫ّجّل‬
‫ني‬ ُّ ‫ّالر‬ ُ ‫َسلَّ ْم‬
َ ّ‫تّعلى‬ ِّ َ‫ّجّل‬
‫ني‬ ُّ ‫ّّالر‬
َ ‫ّيت‬
ُ َ‫َّرأ‬ ِّ ‫ّال‬
‫ّن‬ َ ‫ّج‬
ُ ‫ّالر‬
َ َّ‫ّاء‬
ّ ‫َج‬

They also observed plural ‘isms:

ِ ِ
َ ‫تّعلىّال ُم َد ِرس‬
ّ‫ني‬ ُ ‫َسلَّ ْم‬ َ ‫ّيتّّال ُم َد ِرس‬
ّ‫ني‬ ُ َ‫َّرأ‬ ّ‫ّاءَّّال ُم َد ِر ُسو َن‬
ّ ‫َج‬

They noticed that this is how They called this They called this
most ‘isms change from the grammatical state: grammatical state:
singular, to the dual, to the plural
in a given sentence. They then ّ‫نصب‬ ‫رف ّع‬
said that this ‘ism is in a
“grammatical state” and named
this state:

‫جر‬
ّ

100
They did the same thing with present tense verbs and noticed that present tense verbs had a
particular appearance if certain particles came before them, or if nothing was before them.
In the singular form they appeared like this:

‫ب‬
ّْ ‫(ل)ّيَ ْذ َه‬ ‫ب‬
َّ ‫(لن)ّيَ ْذ َه‬ ‫ب‬
ُّ ‫يَ ْذ َه‬
In the dual conjugations of the present tense, they appeared like this:

‫(ل)ّيَ ْذ َهبَا‬ ‫(لن)ّيَ ْذ َهبَّا‬ ِّ َ‫يَ ْذ َهب‬

‫ان‬
And in the plural conjugations like this:

‫ّ(ل)ّيَ ْذ َهبُوّا‬ ‫(لن)ّيَ ْذ َهبُوا‬ ّ‫يَ ْذ َهبُو َن‬

The voweling of these They noticed that these They noticed that the voweling
verbs did not resemble verbs resembled the of these verbs resembled the
any of the previous
states, so they called grammatical state of ‫ب‬
ّ ‫نص‬, grammatical state of ‫رفع‬, and so
this a new state: and so they said they were they said that these verbs were
‫جزم‬ also in the state of ‫ب‬
ّ ‫نص‬ also in the state of ‫رفع‬

After this was completed they noticed that if an ‘ism was playing a specific role in a sentence,
such as being the direct object of a verb, this always occurred in the same state.
However, the ‘ism would look different if it was a single word, or a dual, or a plural. So they
realized that these states had more than one “grammatical sign” that came with them. Below
they attached specific terms in specific situations according to their state.

‫رفع‬ ‫نصب‬ ‫جر‬

ِّ
ّ‫ُّمْبّتَ َّدأ‬ ّ‫َّم ّْف ّعُولّّبِِه‬ َّْ ‫ّاِ ّْس‬
‫مُّم ُّروِّر‬
‫َّخ َّب‬ ‫ضافّّإِّلَ ِّيه‬ َّ ‫ُّم‬
ِّ َ‫ّف‬
‫اع ّل‬

* Since verbs do not have grammatical roles in sentences, other than being a verb, they
concluded that present tense verbs are in the the state of ‫ رفع‬by default, and that certain
particles or sentence structures cause them to be in the other states.

101
َ ‫ اإلعرا‬for ‘Isms
Reading 5.2 | The Signs of ‫ب‬
In Arabic, there are many types or categories of ‘isms. There are singular words, duals,
plurals, etc., and they are all subject to ‘Irāb, or declension. However not all of these
categories of ‘isms have the same signs, or markers, of declension. These signs, or markers,
of ‘Irāb, the states they correspond to, and what categories they fit into are as follows:

‫ االسمّاملفرد‬- Singular ‘Ism

‫جر‬
ِّ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬

ٌِّ ّ‫َر ُجل‬ ٌَّ ّ‫َر ُجال‬ ٌُّ ّ‫َر ُج ٌل‬

This includes most normal words, such as the names of objects, for example, ‫قلم‬, ‫طاولة‬, ‫جدار‬.
Male Arab-origin names are also included in this category, which take a ‫تنوين‬, even though

they are definite words, for example, ‫د‬

ٌّ ‫ّم َح َّم‬
ُ ‫ َد َرس‬.
َ

‫ – مجعّالتكسري‬Broken Plural

‫جر‬
ِّ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬

ٌِّ ّ‫ِّر َّجال‬ ٌَّ ّ‫ِّر َّجاال‬ ٌُّ ّ‫ِّر َّجا ٌل‬

These words are plurals who do not keep the original singular word (‫ )االسمّاملفرد‬completely

ُ ‫ َر‬is ‫ ِر َجال‬, and in the second word, the

intact in the plural. For example, the plural of ‫جل‬

spelling and pronunciation of the word ‫جل‬

ُ ‫ َر‬is not kept intact. A sound plural would be like
the plural of the word ‫ ُم َد ِرس‬which is ‫سون‬
ُ ‫ ; ُم َد ِر‬notice that in both words, the actual word ‫ُم َد ِرس‬
is completely intact. The ‫ مجعّالتكسري‬may have more words than its original word, or less
words, or more.

102
‫‘ – ّغريّمنصرف‬Isms which do not fully decline

‫جر‬
ِّ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬

ٌَّ ‫إِبْ َر ِاه َّيم‬ ٌَّ ‫إِبْ َر ِاه َّيم‬ ٌُّ ‫إِبْ َر ِاه ُّيم‬
These words differ from the other categories of ‘isms in two ways:
1. They can never take a ‫تَّّْن ِوّين‬,

2. Their sign for the state of ّ‫ جر‬is a ‫حة‬ ّ ‫ّعلَىّإِبْر ِاه‬

َّ ‫ ;فَّّْت‬for example:ّ‫يم‬ َ َ َ ‫ت‬ُ ‫‘ َسلَّ ْم‬I greeted
Ibrahim’. This second rule has two exceptions:
a. If the word has an ‫ال‬

b. or if it is the first part of an ‫ إضافة‬and is in the state of ّ‫جر‬

َّ , it can take a ‫سّرة‬
ّْ ‫َّك‬ َ
ِ َ‫‘ سلَّمتّعلَىّإِب ر ِاهي ِمّق‬I greeted Ibrahim of Qasid’.
. For example: ّ‫اصد‬
َْ َ ُ ْ َ
There are many subsections of this category, but all of these words must be either names or
words which can be used as adjectives. For Level 2, only two subsections of this category
must be memorized, which are: foreign names, and feminine names. Foreign names
include all names whose origin is not from the Arabic language, though the name may be
widely used in the Arab world. Feminine names are those names which are conventionally
used for women, or any name which ends in a ta’ marbūta (whether it’s used for men or
women).

‫ – مجعّاملؤنثّالسال‬Sound Feminine Plural

‫جر‬
ِّ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬

ٌِّ ّ‫طَالِبَات‬ ٌِّ ّ‫طَالِبَات‬ ٌُّ ّ‫ات‬ ِ

ٌ َ‫طَالب‬

The sound feminine plural is the plural of a word made by adding a ‫ ات‬to the word, for
example, ‫ زينب‬- ‫ت‬
ّ ‫زينبا‬, or by taking a word which ends in a ta’ marbūta )‫ (ة‬and replacing it

103
with ‫ات‬, for example, ‫ طالبة‬- ‫ت‬
ّ ‫ّطالبا‬. Female names and characteristics are subject to this
category, and also many (but not all) words which end in a ta’ marbūta )ّ‫(ة‬, such as ‫آيةّ–ّآّيت‬.

In ‫نصب‬, the sign of declension is a ‫كسرة‬, and not a ‫فتحة‬.

‫ – مجعّاملذكرّالسال‬Sound Masculine Plural

‫جر‬
ِّ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬
ِ ِ
‫ي‬ َ ‫ُم َد ِرس‬
ّ‫ني‬ ‫ي‬ َ ‫ُم َد ِرس‬
ّ‫ني‬ ‫و‬ ّ‫ُم َد ِر ُسو َن‬

This is the first category of words whose changing of states is through full letters like ‫ ّو‬and
‫ي‬, and not short vowels like ‫ضمة‬, ‫كسرّة‬, and ‫فتحة‬. The end letter and vowel of all of the
examples above is the same, ending on a ‫ن‬ َّ . Therefore, since this doesn’t change at all, the
final vowel of these words cannot be the sign of change. What changes is the ‫ ّو‬to ‫ ي‬which
comes before the ‫ن‬
َّ . This category is used for male names, traits, adjectives and professions,
َّ ‫‘ ال ُم َح َّم ُدو َنّطَ ِويلُو‬the Muhammads (more than one Muhammad) are tall’.
for example, ‫ن‬

ّ‫ – ال مثن‬Dual

‫جر‬
ِّ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬
‫ي‬ ِ َ‫كِتَاب‬
ّ‫ني‬ ‫ي‬ ِ َ‫كِتَاب‬
ّ‫ني‬ ‫ا‬ ّ‫كِتَ َاِب ِن‬

ِّ or ‫ ي ِّن‬to the end of it. Words which

Almost any word can be made into a dual by adding ‫ان‬

end in a ta’ marbūta )‫(ة‬, are made dual by converting the ta’ marbūta )‫ (ة‬into a normal ta’ّ(‫)ت‬,
for example, ‫مدرسةّ–ّمدرستان‬. Note that in the states of ‫ نصب‬and ّ‫ جر‬the structure of the

duals closely resembles the ‫مجعّال مذكرّالسال‬, though the voweling is different.

104
An important note is that when the ‫ مجعّال مذكرّالسال‬and the ّ‫ مثن‬is the first part of an ‫إضافّة‬,

the ‫ ن‬will drop, for example, ّ‫اّزيد‬ ِ ‫‘ جاء‬The two friends of Zaid came’; notice how
َ ‫ّصدي َق‬
َ ََ
‫ صديقان‬became ‫صديقا‬.

‫“ – األس ماءّاخلمسة‬The Five Words”

‫جر‬
ِّ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬
‫ي‬ ّ‫أَِبّبَكْر‬ ‫ا‬ ّ‫أ ََِبّبَكْر‬ ‫و‬ ّ‫أَبُوّبَكْر‬

“The Five Words” are five specific ‘isms in Arabic whose ‫ إعراب‬is different than all other

words. They are: ‫‘ أخ‬father’, ‫‘ أب‬brother’, ‫‘ حم‬father-in-law’, ‫‘ فم‬mouth’, and ‫‘ ذ ّو‬possessor

of...’. Under two specific conditions these words show a ‫ ّو‬in ‫رفع‬, an ‫ ا‬in ‫نصب‬, and a ‫ ي‬in
ّ‫جر‬. The two conditions for this to happen are:

1. They must be the first part of an ‫إضافّة‬

2. and they must be in the singular form, meaning, not a dual or plural (for example,
َ ‫ أ‬or ‫)إِ ْخ َوة‬.
‫َخ َوان‬
* Additionally, the words ‫ فم‬and ‫ ذ ّو‬also drop their second letter, for example, the ‫م‬

in ‫فم‬, and the ‫ ّو‬in ‫ذ ّو‬, and appear as َّ ِ‫اكّ–ّف‬

‫يك‬ َ ُ‫ف‬, and ّ‫اّمالّ–ّ ِذي‬
َ َ‫وكّ–ّف‬ َ َ‫وّمالّ–ّذ‬
َ ُ‫ذ‬
‫ َمال‬.

105
Exercise 5.1 | Signs of ‘Iraab for Nouns
Instructions | Please fill in the following table on the signs of declension for the different types of ‘isms. Provide an example, and draw
the sign itself in a box in the top left corner of each cell, as shown belo

‫اال ٌِّ ْسمّال ُم ْف ِرد‬ ِ ‫َمجْعّالتَك‬

‫ْس ّري‬ ‫ص ِرف‬ ِ ِ ‫َمجْعّال ُم َذ َّك‬ ‫سّة‬
َّ ‫اخلَ ّْم‬
ّ ُّ‫ماء‬
ّ ‫ا ّألَ ّْس‬
َ ‫َغ ْريّال ُمْن‬ ّ‫َّثّالسال‬
‫َمجْعّال ُم َؤن‬ ّ‫رّالسال‬ ّ‫ال ُمثَ َّن‬

‫صب‬
ْ َ‫ن‬

ُّّ
ّ‫َر ُج ٌل‬ ‫َرفْع‬

ّ‫َجر‬

106
‫‪ for ‘Isms‬اإلعراب ‪Exercise 5.1 | Pratice with Signs of‬‬
‫‪Instructions | Transform the words below into the categories and states requested below,‬‬
‫‪going from left to right. The first example has been done for you. You may have to use the‬‬
‫‪dictionary to complete some examples‬‬

‫‪Original Word‬‬ ‫‪Category‬‬ ‫‪State‬‬ ‫‪Result‬‬

‫َر ُجل‬ ‫مجعّالتكس ّري‬ ‫رفع‬ ‫رجالٌّ‬

‫َر ُجل‬ ‫مجعّالتكس ّري‬ ‫نصب‬
‫َر ُجل‬ ‫مجعّالتكس ّري‬ ‫جر‬
‫ّ‬
‫ُم َد ِرسّ‬ ‫مجعّاملذكرّالسا ّل‬ ‫نصب‬
‫ُم َد ِرسّ‬ ‫مجعّاملذكرّالسا ّل‬ ‫رفع‬
‫ُم َد ِرسّ‬ ‫مجعّاملذكرّالسا ّل‬ ‫جر‬
‫ّ‬
‫َكتَابّ‬ ‫املثن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫جر‬
‫ّ‬
‫َكتَابّ‬ ‫املثن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫رفع‬
‫َكتَابّ‬ ‫املثن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫نصب‬
‫قَلَ ّم‬ ‫مجعّالتكس ّري‬ ‫نصب‬
‫قَلَ ّم‬ ‫مجعّالتكس ّري‬ ‫رفع‬
‫قَلَ ّم‬ ‫مجعّالتكس ّري‬ ‫جر‬
‫ّ‬
‫طَالِبَة‬ ‫مجعّاملؤنثّالسال‬ ‫رفع‬
‫طَالِبَة‬ ‫مجعّاملؤنثّالسال‬ ‫جر‬
‫ّ‬
‫طَالِبَة‬ ‫مجعّاملؤنثّالسال‬ ‫نصب‬
‫طَالِ ّ‬
‫ب‬ ‫مجعّالتكس ّري‬ ‫رفع‬
‫طَالِ ّ‬
‫ب‬ ‫مجعّالتكس ّري‬ ‫نصب‬

‫‪107‬‬
‫طَالِ ّ‬
‫ب‬ ‫مجعّالتكس ّري‬ ‫جر‬
‫ّ‬
‫نَِقيبّ‬ ‫املثن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫نصب‬
‫نَِقيبّ‬ ‫املثن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫رفع‬
‫نَِقيبّ‬ ‫املثن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫جر‬
‫ّ‬
‫ُمنْ ِذر‬ ‫مجعّاملذكرّالسا ّل‬ ‫رفع‬
‫ُمْن ِذر‬ ‫مجعّاملذكرّالسا ّل‬ ‫جر‬
‫ّ‬
‫ُمْن ِذر‬ ‫مجعّاملذكرّالسا ّل‬ ‫نصب‬
‫َسيَّ َارةّ‬ ‫مجعّاملؤنثّالسال‬ ‫رفع‬
‫َسيَّ َارةّ‬ ‫مجعّاملؤنثّالسال‬ ‫نصب‬
‫َسيَّ َارةّ‬ ‫مجعّاملؤنثّالسال‬ ‫جر‬
‫ّ‬
‫إِبْ َر ِاهي ّم‬ ‫غريّمنصرف‬ ‫رفع‬
‫إِبْ َر ِاهي ّم‬ ‫غريّمنصرف‬ ‫نصب‬
‫إِبْ َر ِاهي ّم‬ ‫غريّمنصرف‬ ‫جر‬
‫ّ‬
‫مشس‬ ‫مجعّالتكس ّري‬ ‫جر‬
‫ّ‬
‫مشس‬ ‫مجعّالتكس ّري‬ ‫رفع‬
‫مشس‬ ‫مجعّالتكس ّري‬ ‫نصب‬
‫ِر َسالَةّ‬ ‫املثن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫جر‬
‫ّ‬
‫ِر َسالَةّ‬ ‫املثن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫نصب‬
‫ِر َسالَةّ‬ ‫املثن‬
‫ّ‬ ‫رفع‬
‫ُم ْستَ غْ ِفرّ‬ ‫مجعّاملذكرّالسا ّل‬ ‫نصب‬
‫ُم ْستَ ْغ ِفرّ‬ ‫مجعّاملذكرّالسا ّل‬ ‫جر‬
‫ّ‬
‫ُم ْستَ ْغ ِفرّ‬ ‫مجعّاملذكرّالسا ّل‬ ‫رفع‬
‫‪108‬‬
Reading 5.3 | Implicit Signs of ‫ اإلعراب‬for ‫السـما َء‬
In the Arabic language, when most ‘isms change their grammatical roles in a sentence (and
thus their grammatical states) this is displayed through a short vowel change, or a full letter
change. However, some ‘isms end on a long vowel sound, meaning that they end on one of
the weak letters. Since these are long, stretched sounds the short vowels cannot be
articulated on them easily. Because of this pronunciation difficulty, short vowels may
become implied (or un-pronounced). The rules for when the short vowels are hidden are
three:

‫ | التَ َع ُّذر‬This rule occurs when a word ends on an ‘alif (‫ ا‬or ‫)ى‬. It is actually not possible to

pronounce a short vowel on an ‘alif without changing the ‘alif. For example: ‫ى‬
ّ ‫اءَ ُم ْو َس‬
ّ ‫ َج‬isُ
actually not pronounceable without changing the word to ُ‫وسّأ‬
َ ‫ ُم‬or ُ‫اء‬
ّ ‫وس‬
َ ‫م‬.
ُ Thus, whenever a
short vowel (‫ضمة‬, ‫فتحة‬, ‫ )كسرة‬is put on an ‘alif, the short vowel cannot be pronounced and
becomes implied, for example, the pronunciation of the word above is ‫ى‬
ّ ‫وس‬
َ ‫م‬,ُ but its sign of
ْ
declension is a implied ‫ ضمة‬because it’s the ‫فاعل‬. This can also happen with verbs which
end on an ‘alif. For example, the past tense verb ‫ َد َعا‬is on the pattern ‫ل‬ َّ ‫فَ َع‬, but notice that a
fatha does not appear over the alif in ‫ َد َعّا‬. In the present tense, the verb ‫ يَْب َقى‬should have a

‫ ضمة‬on the ‘alif, since it’s on the pattern ‫يَ ْف َع ُّل‬, but it cannot. Both of these instances are due
to ‫التَ َع ُّذر‬.

‫جر‬
ِّ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬
Example ‫وس ّى‬
َ ‫ىّم‬
ُ َ‫ّعل‬ ُ ‫َسلَّ ْم‬
َ ‫ت‬ ‫وس ّى‬
َ ‫ّم‬
ُ ‫َيت‬
ُ ‫َرأ‬ ‫وس ّى‬
َ ‫ّم‬
ُ َ‫َجاء‬
Hidden ‫كسرّة‬ ‫فتحَّةْنّيَْب َقى‬
‫ل‬ ‫ضمّةيَْب َقى‬
Vowel of ‫ا‬/‫ى‬ Hidden Hidden

‫ | الثِ ْقل‬This rule occurs whenever a word ends on a ‫ي‬

ّ which is proceeded by a ‫كسرة‬, or a ‫ّو‬
which is proceeded by a ‫ضمة‬, for example, such as in the word ‫اضي‬ ِ ‫ ال َق‬and in the verb ‫ي ْدع ّو‬.
ُ َ

109
Similar to the rule of ‫تعذر‬, the short vowels are not allowed to appear on this ‫ ي‬and ‫ّو‬
because of difficulties in pronunciation. This rule has one exception though which is the
‫فتحة‬. | For example, in the sentence ‫ي‬
ّ ‫جاءّالقاض‬, the word ‫ قاضي‬ends on a ‫ ;سكون‬whereas in
the sentence ‫ي‬ ِ ‫ رأَيتّال َق‬there is a pronounceable ‫ فتحّة‬on the word ‫القاض ّي‬.
ّ ‫اض‬
َ ُ َ

‫جر‬
ِّ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬
ِ ‫سلَّمتّعلَىّال َق‬
‫اض ّي‬ ِ ‫رأَيتّال َق‬
‫اض َّي‬ ِ ‫جاءّال َق‬
‫اضي‬
Example َ ُ َْ ُ َ ََ
Hidden ‫كسرّة‬
‫فتحةعُ َّو‬
‫لَ ْنّيَ ْد‬ ‫ضمّةيَ ْدعُ ّو‬
Vowel of ‫ ي‬and ‫و‬ Hidden

There are some words in Arabic which look like they are affected by ‫ الثقل‬but are in fact not.
For example, some names like ّ‫ َعلِي‬end on a ya’ but this ya’ has a shadda on top of it, which

cancels out the effects of ‫ثقل‬. Also, some words made up of three letters look like and are
pronounced as if they are affected by ‫الثقل‬, such as the word ‫النح ّو‬, but in actuality these

words have a ‫ سكون‬in the middle, thus the actual voweling of the word is ‫ح ّو‬
ْ َ‫الن‬. ُ

‫اسبَة‬
َ َ‫ | ال ُمن‬The rule of ‫ املناسبة‬occurs only when a word is put into an ‫ إضافة‬with the pronoun
‫( ي‬meaning ‘my’), such as in the sentence ‫ّص ِد ِيق ّْي‬ َ َ‫ َجاء‬. The word ‫ صديق‬is connected to the
pronoun ‫ي‬ ّ , to give the meaning “my friend.” However, this word is also the doer of the
verb in the sentence, and thus should have a ‫ضمة‬. However, the Arabs make this ‫ضمة‬

implicit because saying ‫ي‬ ّْ ‫ص ِدي ُق‬

َ is not an appropriate sound for the letter ‫ي‬. This rule can
only occur with ‘isms, because only ‘isms can form an ‫إضافة‬. Also, note that the ‫ ي‬meaning
“mine” is not the thing which is affected, but rather the word before it (the ‫ ي‬always takes a
sukoon).

‫جر‬
ِّ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬
Example ‫ىّص ِد ِيق ّْي‬
َ َ‫ّعل‬ ُ ‫َسلَّ ْم‬
َ ‫ت‬ ‫ّص ِد ِيق ّْي‬
َ ‫َيت‬
ُ ‫َرأ‬ ّ ‫ّص ِد ِيق ّْي‬
َ َ‫َجاء‬
Vowel of Letter
before ‫ي‬
‫كسرّة‬ Hidden ‫فتحّة‬ Hidden ‫ضمّة‬
ْ

110
Exercise 5.2 | Implicit Declension
Instructions | Please identify which rule, if any, is applying to the underlined words below
and vowel them correctly including implicit vowels (please write implicit vowels in
parenthesis above the word, or as seen below).

ِّ َ‫ّّالزّّْرق‬
Example | ‫ّاء‬ َ ‫ّّيف‬ِ ‫ّن‬
ُ ‫ّس ُك‬
ّْ َ‫ّدّىّت‬
َ ‫( ُه‬Hidden ‫ ضمة‬due to ‫)التعذر‬

‫ص ِديقِّ ّي‬
َ ّ‫ت‬
ُ ْ‫َرأَي‬ .1

‫وس ّى‬
َ ‫َجاءَّ ُم‬ .2

‫سّالنَ ْح ّو‬
ُ ‫أ َْد ُر‬ .3

ّ‫بّإِ َىلّال َمكْتَ بَ ِة‬ ِ

َ ‫ال َقاضيّذَ َه‬ .4

‫ّعمراّإِىلّبَيتِِّه‬
َ ‫َد َعاّ َزي ٌد‬ .5

َّ ِ‫ُرد ِنّل‬
ِّ َ‫لسنَ ت‬
‫ني‬ ُ ‫َّسيَب َقىّ َع ِامٌر ِّيفّاأل‬ .6

ّ‫يف‬ َّ ‫َمشيّإِ َىلّاجلَ ِام َع ِة ِّيف‬

ِ ‫ّالص‬ ِ ‫لَنّأ‬
ْ .7

ِ ٌ‫اسعة‬
ّ‫ّجدًّا‬ ِ ُ
َ ‫الدنيَاّ َو‬ .8

ِ ‫ّزارّعلِ ّيّال َق‬

َ‫اه َرّة‬ َ ََ .9

‫ص ِد ِيق ّي‬
َ ّ‫ّعلَى‬ ُ َّ‫ َسل‬.10
َ ‫مت‬
‫يسى‬ِ ِ ‫ مرر‬.11
(extra credit)
َ ‫تّّبع‬
ُ ََْ

111
Exercise 5.3 | Practice with Implicit Signs of ‫ب‬
َ ‫اإلعرا‬
Instructions | Fill in the table below identify the implicit sign of the words underlined.
Identify which rule is occuring in the appropriate column. The first example has been done
for you.

Rule Hidden Vowel Sentence and Translation

‫الثقل‬ ___
ُ ‫اضيّإِ َىلّال َم ْح َك َمِّة‬
ِ ‫ذَهبّال َق‬
َ َ
The judge went to the court.
ّ ‫ّالو ِاد‬
‫ي‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫بّأَ ْنّأَمش َيّيف‬
ِ‫أ‬
ُّ ‫َح‬
I love to walk in the valley.
ّ‫ّع ِامراّإِىلّبَيتِ ِه‬
َ ‫وّزي ٌد‬
َ ُ‫يَ ْدع‬
Zaid is inviting Amir to his house.

َ‫ّص ِد ِيقيّّال ِر َسالَّة‬

َ ‫ب‬َ َ‫َكت‬
My friend wrote the letter.

ُ ‫ض ِّيف‬
ّ‫ّالدنْ يَّا‬ ُ ‫َخ َف‬
ْ ‫ّه َوّال َم َكا ُنّاأل‬
ُ‫ت‬ ُ ِ‫البَ ْح ُرّال َمي‬
The Dead Sea is the lowest point in the world.
ِ ِ ِ ِ
َ ‫َسّتَ ْب َقىّفَاط َمةُ ِّيفّقَاصدّل ُمدَّة‬
ّ‫ّسنَة‬
Fatima will stay in Qasid for the length of a year.
ِ‫اِ ْشَتىّالوالِ ُدّه ِديَّةّلِولَ ِدّه‬
َ َ َ ََ
The father bought a gift for his child.
‫ص ِّل‬ ِ ‫قَرأ‬
ْ ‫ْتّّكتَ ِابّّبَ ْع َدّال َف‬
ُ َ
I read the book after the class.
َّ ‫َىّزي ٌدّال َح ِاد‬
‫ث‬ َ ‫َرأ‬
Zaid saw the accident.
ّ‫ّالربِي ِع‬ ِ
َ ‫تَ ْن ُموّاأل َْزَه ُارّيف‬
Flowers grow in the Spring.
‫بّاجلِ َس ِّر‬
ِ ِ‫ىِّبَان‬
ِ ‫ال مستَ ْش َف‬
ُْ
The hospital is beside the bridge.
‫صطََف ّى‬ ِ ِ ‫أَخ ْذ‬
ْ ‫ّم‬
ُ ‫تّالعلْ َمّم ْن‬
ُ َ
I took knowledge from Mustafa.
ّ‫اضيّنَوعٌ ِّم ْنّأَنْ َو ِاعّاألَفْ َع ِال‬ ِ
ِ ‫الفعلّال م‬
َ ُْ
The past tense verb is one of the types of verbs.

112
Reading Comprehension #5 | Prophet Ibrahim

Instructions | Answer the following questions from Prophet Ibrahim Sections 10 and 11.
You may use Hans Wehr as an aid.

Answer the questions on separate sheets of paper or on this document and send it back to
the course via the instructions posted in the assignment link.

Section 10

1. Describe what kind of person the king was.

2. Why did the king call in Ibrahim?

3. What did the king do in response to Ibrahim saying that Allah provides life
and takes it away?

4. What did Ibrahim want?

Section 11

1. Who else did Ibrahim wanted to call to?

2. What happened when he tried?

3. How did Ibrahim feel afterwards?

4. What did Ibrahim decide to do?

113
Translation #5 | Prophet Ibrahim
Instructions | Read Sections 10 and 11 of Prophet Ibrahim. Use Hans Wehr as an aid to
help you in translating.

_____________________________________________________________________

114
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

115
Apply #8 | On the Signs of ‫ اإلعراب‬for ‘Isms
Instructions | Identify the ‘isms in the following sentences or underlined sections, which
categories they belong to, and what their grammatical state is.

ِ ‫ الظُلْمّظُلُماتّيوم‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬
ّ ‫ّالقيَ َامِّة‬ ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
ََ ٌ َ ُ
Opression will be darkness on the Day of Judgment.

ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬
ُّ‫ْسه‬
ُ ‫ىّرأ‬ َ ‫ ال ُم ْؤمنُو َنّ َكَر ُجل َّواح ّدّإِ ْنّا ْشتَ َك‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬
َ ‫ىّعينُهُّا ْشتَ َكىّ ُكلُّهُ َّوّإ ْنّا ْشتَ َك‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
ِ
ُ‫ا ْشتَ َكىّ ُكلُّّه‬
Believers are like a single person; if his eye is in pain his whole body is in pain, and if his
head is in pain his whole body pains.

ِ‫ ح ُّقّّ َكبِ ِريّا ِإلخوةِّعلَىّصغِ ِريِهمّح ُّقّالوالِ ِدّعلَىّولَ ِدّه‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬

ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
َ َ َ َ ْ َ َ َْ َ
The right of an elder brother over the younger ones is like the right of the father over his
children.

ُ ‫ إِنَّ َماّاأل َْع َم‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬

ّ ‫الّ ِِبل َخ َواتِي ِّم‬ ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
Actions will be judged only according to their sealing states [at death].

ّ‫ضبَا ُن‬
ْ ‫ّه َوّ َغ‬ ِ َ‫نيّاثْن‬ ِ ‫ َالّي ْق‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬
ُ ‫ني َّو‬ َْ َ‫نيّ َح َك ٌمّب‬
َّ َ ‫ض‬ َ ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
A judge should not pass judgment between two peope when he is angry.

َّ ِ‫َمجَع‬
ّ ‫ني‬ ِ ‫بّإِلَ ِيه ِّم ْن َّوالِ ِدهِ َّو َّولَ ِدهِ َّوّالن‬
ْ ‫َّاسّأ‬ َّ ‫َح‬
َ ‫ّح َّتّأَ ُكو َنّأ‬
َ ‫َح ُد ُك ْم‬
ِ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬
َ ‫ َالّيُ ْؤم ُنّأ‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
None among you is a [perfect] believer until I become more beloved to him than his father,
his children, and all people.

ِ َّ ‫ إِ َذاّتَ َو‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬

ّ‫يك‬ َ ْ‫َصابِ َعّيَ َدي‬
َ َ‫ك َّوّ ِر ْجل‬ َ ْ‫ضأ‬
َ ‫تّفَ َخل ْلّأ‬ ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
When one of you performs ablution, saturate your fingers and toes.

116
ِّ َ‫اّمّرت‬
ّ ‫ني‬ ِ َّ ‫ إِ َّن‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬
َ ‫َج ُرَه‬
ْ ‫فّأ‬
ُ ُ‫ضع‬
ْ َ‫يّقََّرابَةّي‬
ْ ‫ّعلَىّذ‬
َ َ‫ّالص َدقَة‬ ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
Charity to one’s relative, its reward multiplies twice.

ِ ‫ّالّْي بغِي‬ ِ ِ
١٩-٢٠ّ‫ان﴾ّسورةّالرحن‬َ َْ َّ ‫﴿مَّر َجّالْبَ ْحَّريْ ِنّيَلْتَقيَانّبَْي نَ ُه َماّبَ ّْر َز ٌخ‬
َ
ARBERRY: He let forth the two seas that meet together, between them a barrier they do
not overpass.

PICKTHALL: He hath loosed the two seas. They meet. There is a barrier between them.
They encroach not (one upon the other).

SHAKIR: He has made the two seas to flow freely (so that) they meet together. Between
them is a barrier which they cannot pass.

ّ ١٢ّ ‫سورةّطه‬ ِّ ‫َّكّ ِِبلَْو ِادّالْ ُم َقد‬

﴾‫َّسّطُوى‬ َ ‫كّإِن‬
َّ ‫اخلَ ْعّنَ ْعلَْي‬
ْ َ‫كّف‬ َّ ‫﴿إِِنّأَ َن‬
َّ ُّ‫ّرب‬
ARBERRY: I am thy Lord; put off thy shoes; thou art in the holy valley, Towa.

PICKTHALL: Lo! I, even I, am thy Lord, So take off thy shoes, for lo! thou art in the holy
valley of Tuwa.

SHAKIR: Surely I am your Lord, therefore put off your shoes; surely you are in the sacred
valley, Tuwa,

َّّ ‫اكّ ِِبيَة ِّم‬ ِ ‫ّوَّالّتُع ِذ َْب ّمّقَ ْد‬ ِ ِ ِ َ ِ‫ّرب‬ َّ ‫﴿فَأْتِيَاهُّفَ ُق َوالّإِنَّّ َّر ُس َوال‬
ّ‫ّو‬ َ ِ‫نّرب‬
َّ ‫ك‬ َ َ‫ّجئْ ن‬ ْ ُ َ َّ ‫يل‬ َ ‫كّفَأ َّْرس ْل َّم َعنَاّبَِنّإ ْسَّرائ‬
ّ ٤٧ّ‫ّم ِنّاتَّبَ َعّا َْلَُدىّ﴾ ّسورةّطه‬ َ ‫الس َال ّمُّ َعلَى‬ َّ
ARBERRY: So go you both to Pharaoh, and say, "We are the Messengers of thy Lord, so
send forth with us the Children of Israel and chastise them not; we have brought thee a sign
from thy Lord; and peace be upon him who follows the guidance!

PICKTHALL: So go ye unto him and say: Lo! we are two messengers of thy Lord. So let the
children of Israel go with us, and torment them not. We bring thee a token from thy Lord.
And peace will be for him who followeth right guidance.

SHAKIR: So go you both to him and say: Surely we are two messengers of your Lord;
therefore send the children of Israel with us and do not torment them! Indeed we have
brought to you a communication from your Lord, and peace is on him who follows the
guidance.

117
Apply #9 | On the Implicit Signs of ‫ب‬
َ ‫اإلعرا‬
Instructions | Identify the hidden vowels in the word below which are affected by ‫تعذر‬,
‫ثقل‬, or ‫مناسبة‬, and identify which rule is affecting them.

ّ‫َّقّيَُرائِي‬ ِ ِ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬
َ ‫صد‬ َ ‫ّصلَّىّيَُرائيّفَ َق ْدّأَ ْشَرَك َّو َّم ْن‬
َ َ‫ّص َامّيَُرائيّفَ َق ْدّأَ ْشَرَك َّو َّم ْنّت‬ َ ‫ َم ْن‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
ّ ‫فَ َق ْدّأَ ْشَرَّك‬
Whoever performs prayer with ostentation has empartnered others to Allāh; whoever fasts
with ostentation has empartnered others to Allāh; and whoever gives in charity with
ostentation has empartnered others to Allāh.

‫َّنَّا‬
َ‫ت‬ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬
َ ‫ّص َم‬
َ ‫ َم ْن‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ّق‬
Whoever keeps silent saves himself

‫ّع ْشَرّة‬ ِ ‫ منّصلَّىّعليّو ِاح َدةّصلَّىّهللا‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬

َ ‫ّعلَيه‬
َُ َ َ َّ َ َ ْ َ ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
Whoever sends a blessing (salutations) upon me, Allāh sends ten blessings upon him.

ّ ‫سّ ِِبلغِنَ ىّلِ َم ْنّاِتَّ َق‬

ّ َ‫ىّهللا‬ َ ْ‫ّب‬
ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬
َ ‫ َال‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
There is no harm in wealth for one who fears Allāh.

‫ّآد َم ِّيفّلِ َسانِِّه‬ ِ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬

َ ‫ّخطَ َاّيّابْ ِن‬
َ ‫ أَ ْكثَ ُر‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
The majority of the sins of the sons of Adam are from his tongue.

‫ّس َريةِّالنَِِبِّﷺ‬
ِ ‫ّالش َفاّعن‬
َْ
ِ ‫يّعياضّ َكتَب‬
َ ٌ
ِ ‫اض‬ِ ‫ال َق‬
Al-Qādī Iyād wrote “Al-Shifa” on the life of the Prophet (peace be upon him).

118
Mastery Exercise #5 | Analyzing Sūra Al-Jumu`ah
Instructions | Identify the 'isms in the following verses, which categories they belong to,
and what their grammatical state is. In addition, with appropriate 'isms, identify the implicit
sign and the occurring rule. Use the translation as a guide. Please complete the chart on the
second page. Some examples have been done for you.

ّ‫ثّفَِإ َّّنّ َخلَ ْقنَا ُكمّ ِمنّتَُرابّّ ُّثَّّ ِمنّنُّطَْفةّّ ُّثَّّ ِم ّْنّ َعلَ َقةّّ ُّثَّّ ِمن‬ ِّ ‫يفّ َريْبّّ ِم َّنّالْبَ ْع‬ ّ ِّ‫َّاسّإِنّّ ُكنتُ ّْم‬ ُّ ‫َّّيّأَيُّ َهاّالن‬
َّّ‫َجلّّ ُّم َس ًّم ّىّ ُّثَّّ ُُنْ ِر ُج ُك ّْمّ ِط ْفالّّ ُّث‬ َ ‫ىلّأ‬ ّ ‫يفّ ْاأل َْر َح ِّامّ َمّاّنَ َش‬
َّ ِ‫اءُّإ‬ ّ ِّ‫نيّلَ ُك ّْمّّۚ َونُِق ُّّر‬ َّ َِ‫ضغَةّّ ُُّّمَلََّقةّّ َو َغ ِّْريّ ُُّمَلََّقةّّلِنُب‬
ْ ‫ُّم‬
ّّۚ‫الّيَ ْعلَ َّمّ ِمنّبَ ْع ِّدّ ِعلْمّّ َشْي ئا‬ َّ ‫ىلّأ َْرذَ ِّلّالْعُ ُم ِّرّلِ َكْي‬
َّ ِ‫ّفّ َوِمن ُكمّ َّم ّنّيَُرُّّدّإ‬ َّّ ‫َش َّد ُك ّْمّّۚ َوِمن ُكمّ َّمنّيُتَ َو‬ ُ ‫لِتَ ْب لُغُواّأ‬
﴾
ّ 5﴿ ّ ّ‫لّ َزْوجّّ ََبِيج‬ ِّ ‫تّ ِمنّّ ُك‬ ّْ َ‫تَّوأَنبَ ت‬ ّْ َ‫تّ َوَرب‬ّْ ‫َنزلْنَاّ َعلَْي َهاّالْ َم ّاءَّ ْاهتَ َّز‬ ِ ّ ‫وتَرىّ ْاألَر‬
َ ‫ضّ َهام َدةّّفَِإ َذّاّأ‬ َ ْ ََ
O People, if you should be in doubt about the Resurrection, then [consider that] indeed, We
created you from dust, then from a sperm-drop, then from a clinging clot, and then from a lump
of flesh, formed and unformed - that We may show you. And We settle in the wombs whom
We will for a specified term, then We bring you out as a child, and then [We develop you] that
you may reach your [time of] maturity. And among you is he who is taken in [early] death, and
among you is he who is returned to the most decrepit [old] age so that he knows, after [once
having] knowledge, nothing. And you see the earth barren, but when We send down upon it
rain, it quivers and swells and grows [something] of every beautiful kind.

﴾ ّ ‫اّللّ ُه ّوّا ْحلَ ُّّقّوأَن َّّهُّ َُّْييِيّالْموتَ ّىّوأَن َّّهُّ َعلَىّّ ُك ِّلّ َشيءّّقَ ِد‬
ّ 6﴿‫ير‬
ٌ ْ َ َْ َ َّ ِ‫َذل‬
َّّ ‫كّ ِب‬
َّّ ّ‫َن‬ َ َ
That is because Allah is the Truth and because He gives life to the dead and because He is over
all things competent.

ّ 7﴿ّ‫يفّالْ ُقبُوِّر‬
﴾ ّ ِّ‫ثّ َمن‬
ُّ ‫اّللّيَْب َع‬ َّّ ‫بّفِ َيهاّوأ‬
َّّ ّ‫َن‬ َ ّ ْ‫اعّةَّآتِيَّةٌَّّّالّري‬
َ َ ََ ‫الس‬ َّّ ‫وأ‬
َّ ّ‫َن‬ َ
And [that they may know] that the Hour is coming - no doubt about it - and that Allah will
resurrect those in the graves.

﴾ ّ ‫اّللِّبِغَ ِّْريّ ِعلْمّّوَّالّ ُهد‬

ّ 8﴿ّ‫ىّوَالّّكِتَابّّ ُّمنِري‬
َ َ ّ ِّ‫َّاسّ َمنّ َُيَ ِاد ُّل‬
َّّ ّ‫يف‬ ِّ ‫وِم ّنّالن‬ َ َ
And of the people is he who disputes about Allah without knowledge or guidance or an
enlightening book [from Him].

119
Occurring
Implicit Rule
Grammatical Sign
Verse 'Ism Category ّ,‫ّالثقل‬,‫التعذر‬
State
ٌَّ ٌِ ٌُ
‫املناسبّة‬

ّ‫َّاس‬ ‫مجعّالتكس ّري‬ ‫رفع‬

5 ُ ‫الن‬

120
121
122
CHAPTER SIX
The Signs of I'raab for Verbs | ‫اإلعراب‬

Overview
Now that you are familiar with the concept of ‫إعراب‬, we will apply a similar principle of
declension to verbs.

In this module there is a preparation and proficiency section which are both required while
the mastery section is only highly recommended to finish. Within the preparation section we
will be focusing on the ‫إعراب‬
ّ of verbs. These skills are extremely important as they will be
foundational tools for syntax. You will be introduced to the three states of declension, its
signs and cases where they are implicit. As usual, after completing the required readings and
videos you will be given exercises within ‫ القصصّالنبيني‬and Qur'an. After completing all the
required parts you will be asked to do a reading comprehension exercise within ‫القصصّالنبيني‬
along with enrichment exercises. . Lastly, in order to obtain the level of mastery attempt to
complete an exercise from Surah Al-Haj.

If you are able to complete all of this not only will you have mastered the parts of Arabic
speech but you will also have added a wealth of knowledge from the stories of Prophet
Ibrahim and Surah al-Haj

123
Reading 6.1 | Signs of ‫ اإلعراب‬for ‫الفعالَالمضارع َة‬
Along with most ‘isms, the ‫‘ فعلّمضارع‬present tense verb’ in Arabic is also subject to ‫إعراب‬
‘declension’. The only exceptions are the feminine plural conjugations ّ‫ أنت‬and ‫هن‬
ّ . The
present tense verb varies between ‫رفع‬, ‫ب‬
ّ ‫نص‬, and ‫جزم‬. We can say that ‫ رفع‬is the default state
of the ‫فعلّمضارع‬, since it is in this state that occurs if there are no particles or sentence
structures impacting it. The ‫ فعلّمضارع‬is divided into two categories: those with suffixes

(also called ‫)األفعالّاخلمسة‬, and those without. The latter is also divided into two categories:
‫( صحيحّاَلخر‬end with a strong letter) and ‫( معتلّاَلخر‬end on a weak letter).

‫األفعال اخلمسة‬ Suffixed Present Tense Verbs | The Suffixed Present Tense verbs are also

called ‫األفعالّاخلمسة‬. The ‫ األفعالّاخلمسة‬are those conjugations in the present tense which
end on a suffix: ‫ين‬, ‫ان‬, and ‫ون‬.ّّ All together, they are ‫تفعلني‬, ‫تفعالن‬, ‫ن‬
ّ ‫يفعال‬, ‫تفعلون‬, and ‫يفعلون‬.
Notice that all of these verbs end on a ‫ن‬. When these verbs are impacted by a particle
causing ‫( نصب‬like ‫ )لن‬or ‫( جزم‬like ‫)ل‬, this ‫ ن‬will drop.

‫جزم‬ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬ State

Dropping the ‫ن‬

ّ Dropping the ‫ن‬
ّ Keeping the ‫ن‬
ّ Sign of ‫إعراب‬
ّ‫َلّْتَ ْد ُخ َال‬ ّ‫لَ ْنّتَ ْد ُخ َال‬ ّ‫تَ ْد ُخ َال ِن‬
‫َلّْتَ ْد ُخلِ ّي‬ ‫لَ ْنّتَ ْد ُخلِ ّي‬ َّ ِ‫تَ ْد ُخل‬
‫ني‬ Example

‫َلّْتَ ْد ُخلُوّا‬ ‫لَ ْنّتَ ْد ُخلُوّا‬ ‫تَ ْد ُخلُو َّن‬

Also note that for the conjugations ‫ تفعلون‬and ‫ يفعلون‬when the ‫ ن‬drops from these verbs it

will be replaced with a letter resembling an alif, for example, ‫لّتدخلوا‬, though it is never

pronounced. The reason for this is to distinguish the ‫ّ ّو‬as it sometimes is mixed with the
other one translating as 'and'.

124
‫األفعال الِّيت مل يتِّصل آبخره شيء‬ Non-Suffixed Present Tense Verbs | These verbs are
divided into two categories: those with strong letter endings, and weak letter endings.

The verbs with strong letter endings are as follows:

‫جزم‬ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬ State

ٌّْ ٌَّ ٌُّ Sign of ‫إعراب‬

‫س‬
ّْ ‫َلّْيَ ْد ُر‬ ّ‫س‬
َ ‫لَ ْنّيَ ْد ُر‬ ‫س‬
ُّ ‫يَ ْد ُر‬ Example

The verbs with weak letter endings are as follows

‫جزم‬ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬ State

Dropping the weak

letter Implicit or Explicit ٌَّ Implicit ٌُّ Sign of ‫إعراب‬

ِ ‫َلّْيَ ْم‬
ّ‫ش‬ ّ‫لَ ْنّيَ ْم ِش َي‬ ‫يَ ْم ِشي‬
ّ‫ّ َلّْيَْب َق‬ ‫لَ ْنّيَْب َق ى‬ ‫يَْب َق ى‬ Example
ُ‫ع‬
ّ ‫َلّْيَ ْد‬ ‫لَ ْنّيَ ْدعُ َّو‬ ‫يَ ْدعُو‬

Notice that the verbs with weak letter endings are affected by the pronunciation rules of ‫ثقل‬

and ‫تعذ ّر‬. In the state of ‫رف ّع‬, the ‫ ضمة‬is always hidden no matter which rule affects these

verbs. In the state of ‫ب‬

ّ ‫نص‬, the ‫ فتحة‬may be hidden (if ‫ تعذر‬applies) or explicit (if ‫ثقل‬
applies). In the state of ‫جزم‬, all final weak letters are dropped. Notice that these verbs in the
state of ‫ جزم‬leave a short vowel, such as the ‫ فتحة‬at the end of the verb ‫ق‬
َّ ‫ َلّْيَْب‬reminding us
that an ‘alif was dropped.

125
‫ع ‪ of‬إعراب ‪Exercise 6.1 | Practice with‬‬
‫الفعلَالمضار َ‬
‫‪. You may have to‬فعلّمضارع ‪Instructions | Fill out the following table on conjugating the‬‬
‫‪look up the present tense voweling of the root. The first example has already been done for‬‬
‫‪you.‬‬

‫‪Roots‬‬ ‫‪Pronoun‬‬ ‫‪State‬‬ ‫‪Result‬‬

‫فتح‬ ‫هم‬ ‫نصب‬ ‫حواّ‬

‫يَ ْفتَ ُ‬
‫كرّه‬ ‫ه ّي‬ ‫جزم‬
‫مكث‬ ‫َنن‬ ‫رفع‬
‫قرأ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫أنتّ‬ ‫جزم‬
‫غفر‬ ‫ه ّو‬ ‫رفع‬
‫ك‬
‫سل ّ‬ ‫أنتما‬ ‫نصب‬
‫جهر‬ ‫)‪َ(m‬هاّ‬ ‫رفع‬
‫سلم‬ ‫أنتّ‬
‫َ‬ ‫نصب‬
‫قانت‬ ‫هم‬ ‫رفع‬
‫ت خ رجّ‬ ‫أنت ّم‬ ‫جزم‬
‫اجتهد‬ ‫)‪َ(f‬هاّ‬ ‫نصب‬
‫استغفر‬ ‫أن‬ ‫رفع‬
‫شرب‬ ‫أنت ّم‬ ‫رفع‬
‫انتظرّ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫أنتّ‬ ‫نصب‬
‫تفرق‬ ‫َنن‬ ‫جزم‬
‫تبادل‬ ‫هم‬ ‫نصب‬
‫انفطمّ‬ ‫ه ّي‬ ‫رفع‬

‫‪126‬‬
Exercise 6.2 | Signs of ‘Iraab for Present Tense Verbs

Instructions | Please fill in the following table on the signs of declension for the present
tense verb. Provide an example, and draw the sign itself in a box in the top left corner of
each cell, as shown below.

Non-Suffixed Present Tense Verbs

Suffixed Present Tense
Weak Letter Ending Strong Letter Ending
Verbs

‫رفع‬
ٌّْ
ّ‫ّ(ل م)ّتَ ْد ُخ ْل‬ ‫جزم‬

‫نصب‬

127
Reading Comprehension #6 | Prophet Ibrahim

Instructions | Answer the following questions from Prophet Ibrahim Sections 12 and 13.
You may use Hans Wehr as an aid.

Answer the questions on separate sheets of paper or on this document and send it back to
the course via the instructions posted in the assignment link.

Section 12

5. Name all the parties that were upset or angry with Ibrahim.

6. What did Ibrahim do?

7. Name 4 characteristics of Makkah

8. What did Ibrahim once he arrived to Makkah?

9. Why did he do that?

Section 13

5. What was the issue Hajar faced?

6. What did she do in order to solve this issue?

7. What did Allah do to help Hajar?

8. What is the name of this spring?

128
Translation #6 | Prophet Ibrahim
Directions | Read Sections 12 and 13 of Prophet Ibrahim. Use Hans Wehr as an aid to help
you in translating.

_____________________________________________________________________

129
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

130
Apply #10 | Identifying Verbs and their Bab
Instructions | Read Sections 12 and 13 of Prophet Ibrahim. Then complete the following
table on identifying the ‫فعلّاملضارع‬, its state, the sign of that state, the pronoun and its form.

Form Pronoun Sign of ‫إعراب‬ State ‫الفعل‬

3 ‫ه ّو‬ ‫الفتحة‬ ‫نصب‬ ّ‫يُسافَِر‬

131
Apply #11 | On the ‫ إعراب‬of the ‫ فعلَمضارع‬through the
Qur'an
Instructions | Identify and fill out the chart which states the following present tense verbs
are in and what the sign of that state is. If the verb looks like it might be in more than one
state, or the state looks ambiguous, identify all of the possible states and signs. The first
example has been done for you

َِ ‫يّ َلّ ََْنع ّلّلَه ِّمنّقَبل‬

﴾‫ّْسيًّا‬ ْ ‫﴿ّي َّزَك ِرَّّيّإِنَّّنُبَ ِش ُرَّكّبِغَُالم‬
٧ّ‫سورةّمري‬
ُ ْ ُ ْ َ ْ َّ ‫ّاْسُهُّ ََْي‬ َ
ARBERRY | 'O Zachariah, We give thee good tidings of a boy, whose name is John. No
namesake have We given him aforetime.'

ِ َ‫ك ِّأل ََهبّل‬

ِ ِ‫ولّرب‬ ِ َ َ‫نتّتَِقيًّاّّق‬ ِ
ّ‫كّغُ َالما‬ َ َ ُ ‫الّإََّّنَاّأَ َن َّر ُس‬ َ ‫تّإِِنّأَعُوّذُّ ِِب َّلر ّْح م ِنّمن ٌّْ َكّإِ ْنّّ ُك‬ ْ َ‫﴿ّقَال‬
ّ ٢٠-١٨ّ‫َكّبَغِيًّا﴾ ّسورةّمري‬ ُ ‫ّوّ َلّْأ‬ ّ ِ ‫ّوّ َلَّْيَْ َس ْس‬
َّ ‫نّبَ َشٌر‬ ّ ِّ‫َّنّيَ ُكو ُّن‬
َّ ‫ِلّغُ َال ٌم‬ َّ ‫تّأ‬ ِ
ْ َ‫َزكيًّاّ قَال‬
ARBERRY | She said, 'I take refuge in the All-merciful from thee! If thou fearest Allāh... He
said, 'I am but a messenger come from thy Lord, to give thee a boy most pure. She said,
'How shall I have a son whom no mortal has touched, neither have I been unchaste?'

ِ ‫ني الَّ ِذ‬ِِ ِ ُِّ ‫آنّوّّكِتَاب‬

ّ‫الص َال َةّ َويُ ْؤتُو َّن‬
َّ ّ‫يمو َّن‬
ُ ‫ينّيُق‬
َ َّ ‫ىّوبُ ْشَرىّّللْ ُم ْؤمن‬
َ ‫ّمبنيّّ ُهد‬
ِ
َ ‫تّالْ ُق ْر‬ُ ‫ّآّي‬
َ ‫ك‬ َ ْ‫﴿طس تِل‬
َّ ‫ّه ْمّيُوقِنُو‬
٣-١ّ‫ن﴾ سورةّالنمل‬ ِ
ُ ِ‫الزَكاّةَّّ َّوّ ُهمّ ِِب َْلخَرة‬
َّ
ARBERRY | Ta Sin. Those are the signs of the Qur’an and a Manifest Book, a guidance,
and good tidings unto the believers who perform the prayer, and pay the alms, and have sure
faith in the Hereafter.

ّ‫ّعابِ ُدو َن َّما‬ ُّّْ َ‫اّعب‬

َ ‫دّتّ َّوَّالّأَنتُ ْم‬ َ ‫ّم‬َّ ‫ّعابِ ٌد‬
َ ‫ّعابِ ُدو َن َّماّأ َْعبُ ُّد َّوَّالّأَ َن‬
َ ‫﴿َالّأ َْعبُ ُّدّ َماّتَ ْعبُ ُدونّ َّوَّالّأَنتُ ْم‬
ّ ٥-٢ّ‫د﴾ّسورةّالكافرون‬ ُّ ُ‫أ َْعب‬
ARBERRY | I serve not what you serve, and you are not serving what I serve, nor am I
serving what you have served, neither are you serving what I serve.
ّ
ّ
ّ
ّ

132
Roots Form Pronoun State Sign

ٌُّ
‫ ّر‬-‫ش‬-‫ب‬ 2 ‫َنن‬ ‫رفع‬

133
Mastery Exercise #6 | Analyzing Sūra Al-Jathiyah
Instructions | Read the following surah. Then complete the following table on identifying
the present tense verb, its state, the sign of that state, the pronoun and its form. Please
complete the chart on the page. Some examples have been done for you. (Not every verse
will have a present tense verb)

ّ ١﴿ّ‫حم‬
﴾
Ha, Meem.

ِ ‫ّاّللِّالْع ِزي ِزّا ْحل‬

ّ ٢﴿‫كي ِّم‬ ِ ِ ِ
﴾ َ َ َّ ‫تَن ِزيلّالْكتَابّم َن‬ ُ
The revelation of the Book is from Allah , the Exalted in Might, the Wise.

َّ ِ‫ض ََّل َّيتّلِلْ ُم ْؤِمن‬

ّ ٣﴿‫ني‬
﴾ ِ ‫ّالسماو‬
ِ ‫ات َّو ْاأل َْر‬ ِ
َ َ َّ ‫إ َّن ِّيف‬
Indeed, within the heavens and earth are signs for the believers.

َّ ‫تّلَِق ْومّيُوقِنُو‬
﴾٤﴿‫ن‬ ٌ ‫ّآّي‬
َ ‫نّدابَّة‬
ِ ُّ ‫وِيفّخلْ ِق ُكمّوماّي ب‬
َ ‫ثّم‬ َُ َ َ ْ َ َ
And in the creation of yourselves and what He disperses of moving creatures are signs for
people who are certain [in faith].

ِ ‫يف‬
ّ‫ّالرَّي ِح‬ ِ ‫ص ِر‬
ْ َ‫اّوت‬
ِ
َ َ‫ضّبَ ْع َد َّم ْو ُّت‬ ْ ‫َحيَاّبِِه‬
َ ‫ّاأل َْر‬ ِ ‫ّالس َم ِاء ِّم‬
ْ ‫نّرْزقّفَأ‬ َّ ‫ّاّللُ ِّم َن‬ َ ‫َّها ِر َّوَماّأ‬
َّ ‫َنزَل‬ ِ ِ ‫و‬
َ ‫اخت َالفّاللَّْي ِل َّوالن‬ ْ َ
﴾٥﴿‫ن‬ َّ ‫تّلَِق ْومّيَ ْع ِقّلُو‬
ٌ ‫آّي‬
َ
And [in] the alternation of night and day and [in] what Allah sends down from the sky of
provision and gives life thereby to the earth after its lifelessness and [in His] directing of the
winds are signs for a people who reason.
َّ ‫آّيتِِّهّيُ ْؤِّمنُو‬
﴾٦﴿‫ن‬ َِّّ ّ‫يثّب ع َّد‬ ِ ِّ ‫كّ ِِب ْحل ِقّّۚفَبِأ‬ َِّّ ‫كّآّيت‬ ِ
َ ‫اّللّ َو‬ ْ َ ّ ‫َيّ َحد‬ َ َ ‫اّعلَْي‬ َ ‫وه‬
َ ُ‫ّاّللّنَْت ل‬ ُ َ َ ‫ت ْل‬
These are the verses of Allah which We recite to you in truth. Then in what statement after
Allah and His verses will they believe?

ُ ِ‫َويْ ٌلّل‬
ّ ٧﴿ّ‫ك ِلّأَفَّاكّأَثِيم‬
﴾
Woe to every sinful liar

﴾٨﴿ّ‫س َم ْع َهاّّۚفَبَ ِش ْرّهُّبِ َع َذابّّأَلِيم‬ َّ ‫ّم ْستَكِْباّ َكأ‬

ْ َ‫َنّلّْي‬
ِ ُ ‫ّاّللِّتُْت لَىّعلَي ِه‬
ُ ‫ّثَّّيُص ُّر‬ َْ َّ ‫ت‬ ِ ‫يسمعّآّي‬
َ ََُْ

134
Who hears the verses of Allah recited to him, then persists arrogantly as if he had not heard
them. So give him tidings of a painful punishment.

ٌّ ‫ابّ ُّم ِه‬

﴾٩﴿‫ني‬ َّ ِ‫اّه ُزواّّۚأُولَئ‬
ٌّ ‫كّ ََلُّْمّ َع َذ‬ َ َ‫ّآّيتِن‬
َّ ‫اّشْي ئ‬ ِ ِ َ‫وإِذ‬
ُ ‫اّاَّتَ َذ َه‬ َ ‫اّعل َمّم ْن‬
َ َ
And when he knows anything of Our verses, he takes them in ridicule. Those will have a
humiliating punishment.

ّ‫اب‬ ّ َ‫اّللِّأ َْولِي‬

ٌّ ‫اءَّّۚ َوََلُّْمّ َع َذ‬ ِّ ‫نّ َعْن ُهمّ َّماّّ َك َسبُواّ َشْي ئاّ َوَّالّ َماّ َّاَّتَ ُذواّ ِم ّنّ ُد‬
َّّ ّ‫ون‬ ّ ِ ‫َّمّّۚ َوَّالّيُ ْغ‬
ُ ‫ّج َهن‬
ِ ‫ِم‬
َ ‫نّوَرائ ِه ْم‬
َ
ّ ١٠﴿‫يم‬
﴾ ٌّ ‫َع ِظ‬
Before them is Hell, and what they had earned will not avail them at all nor what they had taken
besides Allah as allies. And they will have a great punishment.

ٌّ ِ‫ابّ ِم ّنّ ِر ْجزّّأَل‬

ّ ١١﴿‫يم‬
﴾ ٌّ ‫تَّرَبِِ ّْمّ ََلُّْمّ َع َذ‬
ِّ ‫ينّّ َك َف ُرواّ ِِب َّي‬ ِ
َ ‫اّهدىّّۚ َوالَّذ‬
ُ ‫َه َذ‬
This [Qur'an] is guidance. And those who have disbelieved in the verses of their Lord will have
a painful punishment of foul nature.

َّ ‫ضلِ ِه‬ ِ ‫كّفِ ِيهّ ِبَم ِرهِّولِتَ ب تَ غُو‬ ِ ِ َّ

﴾ َّ ‫ّولَ َعلَّ ُك ْمّتَ ْش ُك ُرو‬
ّ ١٢﴿‫ن‬ ْ َ‫اّمنّف‬ ْ َ ْ ُ ْ‫يّالْ ُفل‬ َ ‫اّللُّالَّذ‬
َ ‫يّس َّخَرّلَ ُك ُمّالْبَ ْحَرّلتَ ْج ِر‬
It is Allah who subjected to you the sea so that ships may sail upon it by His command and that
you may seek of His bounty; and perhaps you will be grateful.

َّ ‫كََّل َّيتّّلَِق ْومّّيَتَ َف َّك ُرو‬

﴾١٣﴿‫ن‬ َّ ِ‫يفّذَل‬ ِ ‫ّمجيع‬
ّ ِّ‫اّمنْهُّّۚإِ َّّن‬ َِ ‫ض‬ِ ‫ّاأل َْر‬ ِ ‫ّالسماو‬
ِ ‫ات َّوَم‬
ْ ‫اّيف‬ ِ ‫مّم‬
َ َ َّ ‫اّيف‬ َّ ‫َو َس َّخَرّلَ ُك‬
And He has subjected to you whatever is in the heavens and whatever is on the earth - all from
Him. Indeed in that are signs for a people who give thought.

ِ ‫ّاّللِّلِيج ِزيّقَوم‬
ِ ‫اِّبَاّ َكانُواّيك‬ ِِ ِ ِِ
ّ ١٤﴿‫ن‬
﴾ َّ ‫ْسبُو‬ َ َ ‫ّآمنُواّيَ ْغف ُرواّللَّذ‬
ْ َ ْ َ َّ ‫ين َّالّيَ ْر ُجو َنّأ ََّّي َم‬ َ ‫ين‬َ ‫قُلّللَّذ‬
Say, [O Muhammad], to those who have believed that they [should] forgive those who expect
not the days of Allah so that He may recompense a people for what they used to earn.

َّ ‫ىلّ َربِ ُك ّْمّتُ ْر َجعُو‬

ّ ١٥﴿‫ن‬ َّ ِ‫اءَّفَ َعلَْي َهاّّۚ ُّثَّّإ‬
ّ ‫َس‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ ‫منّع ِمل‬
﴾ َ ‫ّصاحلاّفَلنَ ْفسهّّۚ َوَم ّْنّأ‬
َ َ َْ َ
Whoever does a good deed - it is for himself; and whoever does evil - it is against the self. Then
to your Lord you will be returned.

َّ ‫ّعلَىّالْ َعالَ ِم‬

ّ ١٦﴿‫ني‬ ِ ‫مّمنّالطَّيِب‬
ِ َ‫ولََق ْدّآتَي نَاّب ِنّإِسرائِيلّالْ ِكتَابّوا ْحلكْمّوالنُّب َّوةَّورَزقْن‬
﴾ َ ‫اه ّْم‬
ُ َ‫ضلْن‬
َّ َ‫ات َّوف‬َ َ ‫اه‬ ُ ََ ُ َ َ ُ َ َ َْ َ ْ َ َ
And We did certainly give the Children of Israel the Scripture and judgement and prophethood,
and We provided them with good things and preferred them over the worlds.

135
ِ ‫كّي ْق‬ ِ ِ ِ ْ ‫اهمّبَيِنَات ِّم َن‬
ّ‫ضي‬ َ َّ َّ‫اختَ لَ ُفوّاّإَِّّالّمنّبَ ْع ّدّ َماّ َجاءَ ُه ُّمّالْعلْ ُّمّبَ ْغياّبَْي نَ ُه ّْمّّۚإِ َّّنّ َرب‬
ْ ّ‫ّاأل َْم ِرّّۚفَ َمّا‬ ُ َ‫َوآتَ ْي ن‬
﴾١٧﴿‫ن‬ َّ ‫يماّّ َكانُواّفِ ِّيهّ ََيْتَلِ ُفو‬ ِِ ِ
َ ‫بَْي نَ ُه ّْمّيَ ْوَّمّالْقيَ َام ّةّف‬
And We gave them clear proofs of the matter [of religion]. And they did not differ except after
knowledge had come to them - out of jealous animosity between themselves. Indeed, your Lord
will judge between them on the Day of Resurrection concerning that over which they used to
differ.

ِ ِ ِ ْ ‫ّش ِر َيعة ِّم َن‬

ّ ١٨﴿‫ن‬
﴾ َ ‫اّوَالّتَتَّب ْعّأ َْه َواءَّالَّذ‬
َّ ‫ين َّالّيَ ّْعلَ ُمو‬ َ ‫ّاأل َْم ِرّفَاتَّب ْع َه‬ َ ‫ّعلَى‬
َ ‫اك‬
َ َ‫ّج َعلْن‬
َ َّ‫ُث‬
Then We put you, [O Muhammad], on an ordained way concerning the matter [of religion]; so
follow it and do not follow the inclinations of those who do not know.

َّ ‫ِلّالْ ُمت َِّق‬

﴾١٩﴿‫ني‬ ُّّ ِ‫اّللُّ َو‬ ّ َ‫ض ُّه ّْمّأ َْولِي‬
َّّ ‫اءُّبَ ّْعضّّۚ َو‬ َّ ‫ّشْي ئاّّۚ َوإِ َّّنّالظَّالِ ِم‬
ُ ‫نيّبَ ْع‬ َ ِ‫ّاّلل‬
َّ ‫نك ِّم َن‬ َ ‫إِ َِّنُ ْمّلَنّيُ ْغنُو‬
َ ‫اّع‬
Indeed, they will never avail you against Allah at all. And indeed, the wrongdoers are allies of
one another; but Allah is the protector of the righteous.

َّ ‫ىّوَر ْحَةٌّلَِق ْومّيُوقِنُو‬

﴾٢٠﴿‫ن‬ ِ ‫صائُِرّلِلن‬
َ ‫َّاس َّو ُهد‬ َ َ‫َه َذاّب‬
This [Qur'an] is enlightenment for mankind and guidance and mercy for a people who are
certain [in faith].

ِ ِ َّ ‫َنَّنعلَهمّ َكالَّ ِذينّآمّنُواّوع ِملُو‬

َّ ِ ِ َّ ‫ّاج ََتحو‬ ِ ‫أَمّح ِس‬
ّّۚ‫اه ْم َّوَمََا ُُتُْم‬ َّْ ‫ّس َواء‬
ُ َ‫ّحمي‬ َ ‫اّالصاحلَات‬ ََ َ َ ْ ُ َ ْ ‫اّالسيئَاتّأ‬ َ ‫بّالَّذ‬
ُ َ ْ ‫ين‬ َ َ ْ
ّ ٢ ١ ﴿‫ن‬
﴾ َّ ‫اءَّ َماّ ََْي ُك ُمو‬
ّ ‫َس‬
Or do those who commit evils think We will make them like those who have believed and done
righteous deeds - [make them] equal in their life and their death? Evil is that which they judge.

ِ ِ َّ ‫ّاّلل‬
ّ ٢٢﴿‫ن‬
﴾ ْ َ‫ضّ ِِب ْحلَ ِق َّولتُ ْجَزىّ ُكلُّّنَ ْفس ِِّبَاّ َك َسب‬
َّ ‫ت َّو ُه ْم َّالّيُظْلَ ُمو‬ َ ‫ّالس َم َاوات َّو ْاأل َْر‬َُّ ‫َو َخلَ َق‬
And Allah created the heavens and earth in truth and so that every soul may be recompensed
for what it has earned, and they will not be wronged.

ِ ِ‫ّعلَىّبص ِره‬ ِ ِِ ِ َّ ‫تّم ِن‬

ّ‫ّغ َش َاوةّفَ َمن‬ َ َ َّ ‫ّعلَىّْسَْعه َّوقَلْبِه َّو َج َع َل‬
َ ‫ّعلَىّعلْم َّو َختَ َم‬ َّ ُ‫َضلَّه‬
َ ُ‫ّاّلل‬ َ ‫ّه َواهُ َّوأ‬َ ُ‫ّاَّتَ َذّإِ ََلَه‬ َ َ ْ‫أَفَ َرأَي‬
ّ ٢٣﴿‫ن‬
﴾ ََّ‫ّاّللِّّۚأَف‬
َّ ‫الّتَ َذ َّك ُرو‬ َّ ‫يَ ْه ِد ِيه ِّمنّبَ ْع ِد‬
Have you seen he who has taken as his god his [own] desire, and Allah has sent him astray due
to knowledge and has set a seal upon his hearing and his heart and put over his vision a veil? So
who will guide him after Allah ? Then will you not be reminded?

136
َّ ِ‫َّه ُرّّۚ َوَماّ ََلُّمّبِ َذل‬
ّ‫كّ ِم ّْنّ ِعلْ ّمّّۚإِ ّْنّ ُه ّْم‬ ِ
ْ ‫اّوَماّيُ ْهل ُكنَاّإَِّالّالد‬
َ َ‫وت َّوََْني‬
ِ ‫وقَالُو‬
َ ‫اّماّه َيّإَِّال‬
ُ ُ‫ّحيَاتُنَاّالدُّنْيَاََّّن‬ َ َ
﴾٢٤﴿‫ن‬ َّ ‫إَِّّالّيَظُنُّو‬
And they say, "There is not but our worldly life; we die and live, and nothing destroys us except
time." And they have of that no knowledge; they are only assuming.

َّ ِ‫ّص ِادق‬
ّ ٢٥﴿‫ني‬
﴾ َّ ‫ّح َّجتَ ُه ْمّإَِّالّأَنّقَالُواّائْتُواّ ِِب َِبئِنَاّإِنّ ُكنتُ ْم‬ َّ ‫ّآّيتُنَاّبَيِنَات‬
ُ ‫ّماّ َكا َن‬ َ ‫َوإِ َذاّتُْت لَى‬
َ ‫ّعلَْي ِه ْم‬
And when Our verses are recited to them as clear evidences, their argument is only that they say,
"Bring [back] our forefathers, if you should be truthful."

ّ ٢٦﴿‫ن‬ ِ َّ‫بّفِ ِيه َّولَ ِك َّنّأَ ْكثَ َّرّالّن‬

َّ ‫اس َّالّيَ ْعلَ ُمو‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ ُ ‫ّثَّّ َُيِيتُ ُك ْم‬
ُ ‫َّييِي ُك ْم‬ َّ ‫قُ ِل‬
﴾ َ ْ‫َّي َمعُ ُك ْمّإ َىلّيَ ْومّالْقيَ َامة َّال َّري‬
َْ َّ‫ّث‬ ُْ ُ‫ّاّلل‬
Say, " Allah causes you to live, then causes you to die; then He will assemble you for the Day of
Resurrection, about which there is no doubt, but most of the people do not know."

َّ ‫اع ّةُّيَ ْوَمئِذّّ ََيْ َس ُّرّالْ ُمْب ِطلُو‬

ّ ٢٧﴿‫ن‬ ِ ‫ّالسماو‬
ِ ‫ات َّو ْاأل َْر‬ ِِ
﴾ َ ‫الس‬
َّ ُّ‫وم‬
ّ ‫ضّّۚ َويَّ ْوَّمّتَ ُق‬ َ َ َّ ‫ك‬
ُ ْ‫ّمل‬
ُ ‫َو َّّلل‬
And to Allah belongs the dominion of the heavens and the earth. And the Day the Hour
appears - that Day the falsifiers will lose.

﴾ َّ ‫ّجاثِيَةّّّۚ ُك ُّّلّأ َُّمةّّتُ ْد َعىّّإِ َىلّّكِتَ ِاَبَاّالْيَ ْوَّمّ َُْتَزْو َّنّ َماّّ ُكنتُ ّْمّتَ ْع َملُو‬
ّ ٢٨﴿‫ن‬ َ ‫َوتَ َرىّ ُك َّلّأ َُّمة‬
And you will see every nation kneeling [from fear]. Every nation will be called to its record [and
told], "Today you will be recompensed for what you used to do.

ّ ٢٩﴿‫ن‬ ِ َ‫نطقّعلَي ُكمّ ِِب ْحل ِقّّۚإِ َّنّّ ُكنَّاّنَست‬

َّ ‫نس ُّخّ َماّّ ُكنتُ ْمّّتَ ْع َملُو‬ ِ ِ
﴾ ْ َ ْ َ ُ َ‫َه َذاّّكتَابُنَاّي‬
This, Our record, speaks about you in truth. Indeed, We were having transcribed whatever you
used to do."

ّ ٣٠﴿‫ني‬
﴾ َّ ِ‫اتّفَيُ ْد ِخلُ ُه ْم َّرَُّبُ ْم ِّيف َّر ْحَتِ ِهّّۚ َذل‬
ُّ ِ‫كّ ُه َّوّالَْف ْوُّزّالْ ُمب‬ ِ َّ ‫فَأ ََّماّالَّ ِذينّآمنُواّوع ِملُو‬
ِ ‫احل‬
َ ‫اّالص‬ ََ َ َ
So as for those who believed and did righteous deeds, their Lord will admit them into His
mercy. That is what is the clear attainment.

َّ ‫اُّم ِرِم‬ ِ
﴾٣١﴿‫ني‬ ُّْ ‫ْبُّْتّوُكنتُ ْمّقَ ْوم‬
ْ َ ‫استَك‬
َ َ ‫ّآّيِِتّتُتْ لَى‬
ْ َ‫ّعلَْي ُك ْمّف‬ َ ‫َوأ ََّماّالَّذ‬
َ ‫ينّ َك َف ُرواّأَفَلَ ْمّتَ ُك ْن‬
But as for those who disbelieved, [it will be said], "Were not Our verses recited to you, but you
were arrogant and became a people of criminals?

137
ّ‫اَّن ُن‬
َْ ‫ًّاّوَم‬ ِ ِ َ ‫اّالس‬
َ ‫اعةُّإنّنَّظُ ُّنّإَّّالّظَن‬ َّ ‫يّم‬ َّ ُ‫بّفِ َيهاّقُلْت‬
َ ‫مّماّنَ ْد ِر‬ َ ْ‫اعةُ َّال َّري‬
َ ‫الس‬
َّ ‫ّحق َّو‬ َِّ ‫وإِ َذاّقِيلّإِ َّنّو ْع َد‬
َ ‫ّاّلل‬ َ َ َ
ّ﴾٣٢﴿‫ني‬ ِ
َّ ِ‫ِِبُ ْستَ ْيقن‬
And when it was said, 'Indeed, the promise of Allah is truth and the Hour [is coming] - no
doubt about it,' you said, 'We know not what is the Hour. We assume only assumption, and we
are not convinced.' "

﴾ َّ ‫مّماّ َكانُواّبِِهّيَ ْستَ ْه ِزئُو‬

ّ ٣٣﴿‫ن‬ َّ ِِ‫َّب‬
ّ ‫اق‬ َ ‫اّو َح‬ ِ ‫وب َداّ ََلمّسيِئَاتّم‬
َ ‫اّعملُو‬
َ َ ُ َ ُْ َ َ
And the evil consequences of what they did will appear to them, and they will be enveloped by
what they used to ridicule.

ِ ‫َّارّوماّلَ ُك‬
ِ ‫مّمنّن‬
َّ ‫َّص ِر‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ
ّ ٣٤﴿‫ين‬
﴾ َ َ ُّ ‫اّوَمأَْوا ُك ُمّالن‬
َ ‫ّه َذ‬
َ ‫نسا ُك ْمّ َك َماّنَسيتُ ْمّل َقاءَّيَ ْوم ُك ْم‬
َ َ‫َوقيلّالْيَ ْوَمّن‬ َ
And it will be said, "Today We will forget you as you forgot the meeting of this Day of yours,
and your refuge is the Fire, and for you there are no helpers.

ّ‫ّه ْم‬ ِ َِّ ‫ت‬ َّ ‫َذلِ ُكمّ ِبَنَّ ُكم‬

ِ ‫ّاَّتَ ْذ ُّْتّآّي‬
ُ ‫اّوَال‬
َ ‫َّيَْر ُجو َنّمْن َه‬
ُ ‫اّو َغَّّرتْ ُك ُمّا ْحلَيَاةُّالدُّنْيَاّّۚفَالْيَ ْوَم َّال‬
َ ‫ّه ُزو‬
ُ ‫ّاّلل‬ َ ُ
﴾٣٥﴿‫ن‬
َّ ‫يُ ْستَ ْعتَ بُو‬
That is because you took the verses of Allah in ridicule, and worldly life deluded you." So that
Day they will not be removed from it, nor will they be asked to appease [ Allah ].

َّ ‫بّالْ َعالَ ِم‬

ِ ‫ضّر‬ ِ َّ ‫ب‬
ِ ‫اتّور‬ ِ ‫فَلِلَّ ِهّا ْحلم ُدّر‬
﴾٣٦﴿‫ني‬ َ ِ ‫ّاأل َْر‬
ْ ‫ب‬ َ َ ‫ّالس َم َاو‬ َ َْ
Then, to Allah belongs [all] praise - Lord of the heavens and Lord of the earth, Lord of the
worlds.

ِ ّ ‫ضّّۚوه ّوّالْع ِز‬ ِ َّ ‫ولَهّالْ ِك ِبّيء ِّيف‬

﴾٣٧﴿‫يم‬ ُ َ َ ُ َ ِ ‫ّالس َم َاوات َّو ْاأل َْر‬
ُّ ‫يزّا ّْحلَك‬ َُْ َُ
And to Him belongs [all] grandeur within the heavens and the earth, and He is the Exalted in
Might, the Wise.

138
‫‪Form‬‬ ‫‪Pronoun‬‬ ‫إعراب ‪Sign of‬‬ ‫‪State‬‬ ‫الفعل‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ه ّو‬ ‫الضمة‬
‫َّ‬ ‫رفع‬ ‫يَبُثُّّ‬

‫‪139‬‬
140
141
CHAPTER SEVEN
Fixedness | ‫البناء‬

Overview
Now that you are familiar with the concept of ‫إعراب‬, we will look at the concept of fixedness
which is precisely the opposite of declension, a word that is unable to change its state
regardless of syntax.

In this module there is a preparation and proficiency section which are both required while
the mastery section is only highly recommended to finish. Within the preparation section we
will be focusing on the ‫ البناء‬of nouns and verbs. These skills are extremely important as they
will be foundational tools for syntax. You will be introduced to the different category of
words which fall under ‫مبن‬. As usual, after completing the required readings and videos you
will be given exercises within ‫ القصصّالنبيني‬and hadith. After completing all the required

parts you will be asked to do a reading comprehension exercise within ‫ القصصّالنبيني‬along

with enrichment exercises. . Lastly, in order to obtain the level of mastery attempt to
complete an exercise from a hadith concerning wudu.

If you are able to complete all of this not only will you have mastered the parts of Arabic
speech but you will also have added a wealth of knowledge from the stories of Prophet
Ibrahim and hadith from Prophet Muhammad.

142
Reading 7.1 | ‘Isms which do not have ‫ب‬
َ ‫اإلعرا‬

While many ‘isms in Arabic have ‫ إعراب‬there are some whose endings never change, no
matter what they are doing in a sentence. This concept is the opposite of ‫ إعراب‬and is called

‫‘ بناء‬fixedness’. The scope of ‫ بناء‬and ‫ إعراب‬can be thought of as such:

Every ‫احلرف‬ Certain types of ّ‫األس ماء‬ Most types of ّ‫األس ماء‬
‫البناء‬ ‫اإلعراب‬
Fixedness Declension
‫الفعل املاضي‬ A few of the
Most of the ‫الفعل املضارع‬
‫الفعل املضارع‬
‫الفعل األمر‬

Those words which fall under the category of fixedness are called ّ‫ َّم ّبنِي‬, while those which
fall under declension are called ‫ب‬
ّ ‫ ُّم ّْعّر‬. It is always important to mention with words having
َ
fixedness which short vowel they are fixed upon. So for example, the word ‫ت‬
َّ ْ‫ أن‬is fixed on
the final ‫فتحة‬. In most cases, this “sign of ّ‫ ”مبن‬will be the final short vowel, meaning the
short vowel on the final letter (with the exception of ‫)الفعلّاألمر‬.

A very important characteristic of the ‫ أس م اء‬which are ّ‫ م بن‬is that they are always in a ّ‫‘ م حل‬a

grammatical site’. This means that although theseّ‫ أس م اء‬never change their endings due to
their grammatical role in a sentence they are nonetheless still playing a grammatical role, such
as a ‫ فاعل‬or ‫مبتدأ‬. To check what ّ‫ م حل‬a fixed ‘ism should be in, we can use the following
test:

What would happen if this

‫َجاءَّ َه َذا‬ If this word was placed in the “site” of
fixed ‘ism was removed the fixed ‘ism above it, it would be in the
from this sentence and state of ‫ رفع‬since it’s the doer of the verb.
replaced with a declining
‘ism? ‫َر ُج ٌّل‬ This word ‫ هذا‬is in the ‫حل‬
ِّ ‫ م‬of ‫رفع‬

143
Categories of ّ‫ مبن ي‬words | The following types of words are fixed:

‫احلروف‬ ‫األفعال‬ ‫األس م اء‬

‫الضمي‬
All pronouns, whether they
are in their attached or
detached forms, are fixed on
the final short vowel.

‫اسم اإلشارة‬
‫الفعل ال ماضي‬ These words are fixed on the
All past tense verbs are fixed final short vowel, except for
on the vowel on the final the dual forms, which
root letter. decline.

‫الفعل األمر‬
Every ‫ حرف‬is fixed on the The commands are fixed on
‫اسم ال موصول‬
final short vowel. the corresponding sign of These words are fixed on the
jazm in the present tense. final short vowel, except for
the dual forms, which
decline.
‫الفعل ال مضارع‬
Only the female plural
conjugations are fixed on the ‫اسم االستفهام‬
sukoon on the final root letter.
These words are fixed on the
final short vowel.

‫اسم الشرط‬
These words are fixed on the
final short vowel

144
‫ | الضمائر‬See Section 1.9

‫ | االسم اإلشارة‬These are called demonstrative pronouns in English, though they are not
considered ‫‘ ضمائر‬pronouns’ in Arabic. These are words which refer or point to something,

like ‫ هذا‬or ‫ذلك‬, meaning ‘this’ or ‘that’, and they have a distinct “near” and “far” form. The

dual form of the ‫اإلشارة‬ ‫ اسم‬is not ‫مبن‬

ِّ .
Far Near

Female Male Female Male

َ ِ‫ذّل‬ ِ‫هّ ِذّه‬

َ ‫تِْل‬
ّ‫ك‬ ّ‫ك‬ ‫هّ َذّا‬ Singular

َ ِ‫أُولَئ‬
ّ‫ك‬ ّ‫هّ ُؤَال ِء‬ Plural

‫ | اسم ال موصول‬These are called relative pronouns in English, but are not considered true
pronouns in Arabic like the ‫اسمّاإلشارة‬. These words require having a full sentence or a

prepositional phrase after them, which is called the ‫مجلةّالصلة‬. To illustrate, the sentence ّ‫جاء‬

‫ الذي‬by itself means ‘Came the one who….’ and this is incomplete because it doesn’t explain
who the person or thing is. However, a sentence like ‫ جاءّالذيّمنّأمريكا‬meaning ‘Came the
one who is from America’ has a ‫ الصلة‬afterwards and thus makes sense. Again the dual

form of this category is not ‫مبن‬.

ِّ
Female Male

ّ َِّ‫ال‬
‫ت‬ ‫الَّ ِذي‬ Singular

ِ َ‫اللَّت‬
ِّ َ‫انّ|ّاللَّت‬
‫ني‬ ‫اللَّ َذ ِانّ|ّاللَّ َذي ِّن‬ Dual

ّ ِ‫الالئِيّ|ّاللََّو‬
‫اِت‬ َّ ّ|ّ ّ‫الالِِت‬
َّ َّ ‫الَّ ِذ‬
‫ين‬ Plural

145
‫ اسم االستفهام‬and ‫ | اسم الشرط‬These ‘isms are used to ask questions in Arabic. As they are

‘isms they can take grammatical roles such as the ‫ مبتدأ‬or ‫ خب‬in a sentence. The only
difference between the ‫ اسمّاالستفهام‬and the ‫ط‬
ّ ‫ اسمّالشر‬is that the latter occur in a spefic
sentence structure called ‫ط‬
ّ ‫ ;الشر‬otherwise both of these types of ‘isms are identical.

Who When Where What How

ّ‫َم ْن‬ ّ‫َم َت‬ ّ‫َين‬

َ‫أ‬ ‫َما‬ ّ‫يف‬
َ ‫َك‬

146
Exercise 7.1 | Fixed Words and their ‫محل‬
َ
Instructions | Identify the fixed vowel of the underlined words below, and if they are an
‫ اسم‬which type of ّ‫ّمبن‬.

ْ َ‫كّالْ ُق ْرآ َنّّلِت‬

ّ ٢ّ‫ش َقىّ﴾ّسورةّطه‬ َّ ‫َنزلْنَاّ َعلَْي‬
َ ‫﴿ َماّأ‬
ARBERRY | We have not sent down the Qur’an upon thee for thee to be unprosperous.

َ ْ‫﴿إَِّّالّتَذْكِرةّلِمنّ ََي‬
٣ّ‫شىّ﴾ سورةّطه‬
َ َ
ARBERRY | but only as a reminder to him who fears

ّ ٤ّ‫﴾ سورةّطه‬ ِ ‫السماو‬

ّ ‫اتّالْعُلَى‬ ْ ‫﴿تَن ِزيالّ ِّم َّم ّْنّ َخلَ َق‬
َ َ َّ ّ‫ضّ َّو‬
َ ‫ّاأل َْر‬
ARBERRY | a revelation from Him who created the earth and the high heavens;

ْ ّ‫الر ّْح م نّ َعلَىّالْ َعر ِش‬

٥ّ‫استَ وىّ﴾ سورةّطه‬
َ ْ َُّ ﴿
ARBERRY | the All-compassionate sat Himself upon the Throne;

٦ّ‫تّالثَّرىّ﴾ّسورةّطه‬ ِ ‫يفّ ْاأل َْر‬ ِ ‫السماو‬

ّ ِّ‫اتّ ّوّ َما‬ ّ ِّ‫﴿ّلَّهُّ َما‬
َ َ ‫ضّ ّوّ َمّاّبَْي نَّ ُّهماّ ّوّ َماّ ََْت‬
َ َ َ َ ََ َّ ّ‫يف‬
ARBERRY | to Him belongs all that is in the heavens and the earth and all that is between
them, and all that is underneath the soil.

147
‫مبنّعل ّى‬ ‫اإلسم‪ّ,‬حرف‪ّ,‬فعل‬

‫‪148‬‬
Exercise 7.2 | ‫ مبني‬Words
Instructions | Please fill in the following table by listing all the types of ‫ مبن‬words, with
four examples from each category.

ّ‫حرف‬ ّ‫فعل‬ ‫اسم‬

Instructions | Write the type of mabni word and what it's fixed vowel is on of the boxed
words in the following sentences

َ َ َ ِ‫﴿وَمنّيَ ْف َعلّذَل‬
٢٣١ّ‫كّفَ َق ْدّظَلَمّنَ ْفسهُ﴾ّسورةّالبقرة‬
ْ َ
ARBERRY | Whoever does that has wronged himself

ِ ‫ّاَل‬
١٥٦ّ‫خرةِ﴾ّسورةّاألعراف‬ ْ ‫اّحسنَةّوِيف‬ ِ ِ ‫اّيف‬
َ َ َ َ ِ َ‫بّلَن‬
َ َ‫ّه ذهّالدُّنْي‬ ْ ُ‫﴿وا ْكت‬ َ
ّ
ARBERRY | And prescribe for us in this world good, and in the world to come. ّ

٧ّ‫ّعلَْي ِهم﴾ّسورةّالفاَتة‬ ِ ِ
ْ َ ‫ت‬َ ‫﴿صرا َطّالَّذينّأَنْ َع ْم‬
َ َ
ARBERRY | the path of those whom Thou hast blessed

149
Reading Comprehension #7 | Prophet Ibrahim

Instructions | Answer the following questions from Prophet Ibrahim Section 14. You may
use Hans Wehr as an aid.

Answer the questions on separate sheets of paper or on this document and send it back to
the course via the instructions posted in the assignment link.

Section 14

1. What did Ibrahim do after he returned to Makkah?

2. What did Ibrahim dream about?

3. Why did Ibrahim know that his dream was truthful?

4. What did Ibrahim do after he woke up?

5. What happened when Ibrahim attempted to follow what Allah commanded

of him?

6. How is this significant?

150
Translation #7 | Prophet Ibrahim
Instructions | Read Section 14 of Prophet Ibrahim. Use Hans Wehr as an aid to help you
in translating.

_____________________________________________________________________

151
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

152
Apply #12 | Identifyingَ‫ مبني‬Isms Prophet Ibrahim
Instructions | Read Section 14 of Prophet Ibrahim. Then complete the following table on
identifying the ‫ مبن‬ism, and what it is fixed on. Make sure to list every ‫ّاسم‬,‫ّفعل‬,‫ حرف‬which
is fixed even if repeated.

‫مبنّعل ّى‬ ‫ّفعل‬,‫ّحرف‬,‫اإلسم‬ ‫مبنّعل ّى‬ ‫ّفعل‬,‫ّحرف‬,‫اإلسم‬

153
Apply #13 | Fixed isms through the Qur'an
Instructions | Identify and fill out the chart with the fixed isms and what they are fixed on
through Surah Al-Zalzalah

1ّ﴾‫ضّ ِزلَْزا ََلَا‬ ِ َ‫اّزلْ ِزل‬

ُ َ‫﴿إِذ‬
ُ ‫ّاأل َْر‬
ْ ‫ت‬
When the earth is shaken with its [final] earthquake

2ّ﴾‫ضّأَثْ َقا ََلَا‬ ِ ‫َخرج‬

ُ ‫ّاأل َْر‬
ْ ‫ت‬ َ َ ْ ‫﴿ َوأ‬
And the earth discharges its burdens

3ّ﴾‫نسا ُن َّماّ ََلَا‬ ِْ ‫ال‬

َ ‫ّاإل‬ َ َ‫﴿ َوق‬
And man says, "What is [wrong] with it?" -

4ّ﴾‫َخبَ َّارَها‬ ُ ‫َّتَ ِد‬

ْ ‫ثّأ‬ ُ ‫﴿يَ ْوَمئِذ‬
That Day, it will report its news

5ّ﴾‫كّأ َْو َحىّ ََلَا‬ َّ ‫﴿ ِب‬

َ َّ‫َن َّرب‬
Because your Lord has commanded it.

ّ ‫َّاسّأَ ْشتَاَتّلَُِريْواّأ َْع َما ََلُّْم‬

6ّ﴾ ُ ‫ص ُد ُرّالن‬
ِ
ْ َ‫﴿يَ ْوَمئذّي‬
That Day, the people will depart separated [into categories] to be shown [the result of] their
deeds.

7ّ﴾ُ‫ّخ ْرياّيََرّه‬ َ ‫﴿فَ َمنّيَ ْع َم ْل ِّمثْ َق‬

َ ‫الّذَ َّرة‬
So whoever does an atom's weight of good will see it,

8ّ﴾
ّ ُ‫ّشًّراّيََرّه‬ َ ‫﴿ َوَمنّيَ ْع َم ْل ِّمثْ َق‬
َ ‫الّذَ َّرة‬
And whoever does an atom's weight of evil will see it.

154
‫احملالّ‬ ‫اإلسم‬ ‫احملالّ‬ ‫اإلسم‬

‫ّ‬

‫‪155‬‬
Mastery Exercise # 7| Analyzing Hadith
Instructions | Read the following hadith concerning wudu. Then complete the following
table on identifying the type of fixed word and what it is fixed on. Only complete this
exercise for the underlined portion.
ّ-ّ‫ّس ْعد‬ َ ‫ّ ُه َوّابْ ُن‬-ّ،‫ث‬ ُ ‫ّحدَّثَنَاّاللَّْي‬َ ‫ال‬ َ َ‫ّق‬،‫اّآدمُّبْ ُنّأَِبّإِ َّيس‬ َ َ‫ّحدَّثَن‬ َ ‫ال‬ َ َ‫ّق‬،‫صور‬ ُ ْ‫ّع ْم ُروّبْ ُن َّمن‬ َ ‫َخ ََبَن‬ ْ‫أ‬
َّ‫ّحبِيب َّوأَبُوّطَْل َحة‬ َّ ‫ض ْمَرةُّبْ ُن‬َ ‫ّع ِامر َّو‬ َ ‫ّسلَْي ُمّبْ ُن‬،
ُ ‫وَّي َي‬ َْ ُ‫َخ ََبِنّأَب‬ َ َ‫ّق‬،‫ّصالِح‬
ْ ‫الّأ‬ َ ‫اّم َعا ِويَةُّبْ ُن‬ُ َ‫ّح َّّدثَن‬َ ‫ال‬ َ َ‫ق‬
ّ‫ول‬َ ‫تّ َّّي َّر ُس‬ُّ ْ‫ولّقُل‬ ُ ‫ّيَ ُق‬،َ‫ّعبَ َسة‬ َ ‫ّع ْمَروّبْ َن‬ َ‫ت‬
َِ ‫ول‬
ُ ‫ّْس ْع‬ ُ ‫ّيَ ُق‬،‫اهلِ َّي‬
ِ ‫اّْسعنَاّأَِبّأُمامةَّالْب‬ ِ
َ َ َ َ ْ َ ‫نُ َعْي ُمّبْ ُنّ ِزَّيدّقَالُو‬
َّ ‫َّكّإِذَاّتَ َو‬ َِّ
ّ‫ت‬ ْ ‫اّخَر َج‬ َ ‫كّفَأَنْ َقْي تَ ُه َم‬َ ‫تّ َكفَّْي‬َ ْ‫تّفَغَ َسل‬ َ ْ‫ضأ‬ َ ‫ضوءُّفَِإن‬ ُ ‫الّّّ"ّأ ََّماّالْ ُو‬ َ َ‫ضوءُّق‬ ُ ‫فّالْ ُو‬ َ ‫اّللّ َكْي‬
ّ‫ك‬َ ْ‫ك َّويَ َدي‬ َ ‫ت َّو ْج َه‬ َ ‫ك َّو َغ َس ْل‬َ ْ‫ت َّمْن ِخَري‬ َ ‫استَ ْن َش ْق‬
ْ ‫ت َّو‬َ‫ض‬ ْ ‫ض َم‬ْ ‫اّم‬َ ‫كّفَِإ َذ‬ َ ِ‫نيّأَظَْفا ِرَك َّوأَ َن ِمل‬ِ ْ َ‫َخطَ َاّي َك ِّم ْنّب‬
ّ‫ّخطَ َاّي َكّفَِّإ ْن‬ ِ ‫نيّا ْغتَسلْت ِّمن‬ ِ ْ ‫إِ َىلّالْ ِم ْرفَ َق‬
َ ‫ّع َّامة‬ َ ْ َ َ ِ ْ َ‫كّإِ َىلّالْ َك ْعب‬ َ ‫تّ ِر ْجلَْي‬َ ْ‫ك َّو َغ َسل‬َ ‫ْس‬ َ ‫ت َّرأ‬ َ ‫ني َّوَم َس ْح‬
َّ‫الّأَبُوّأ َُم َامة‬َ َ‫ّق‬.ّ"ّ‫ّك‬ َ ‫كّأ ُُّم‬ َ ْ‫ّخطَ َاّي َكّ َكيَ ْوَم َّولَ َدت‬ ِ ‫ّّللِّعَّزّوج َّلّخرج‬ ِ َ ‫أَنْتّوضعتّوجه‬
َ ‫تّم ْن‬ َ ْ َ َ َ َ َ َّ ‫ك‬ َْ َ َ َْ َ َ
ّ‫اّللِّلََّق ْد‬
َّ ‫اّو‬
َ ‫الّأ ََم‬َ ‫احدّفَ َق‬ ِ ‫ُّملِسّو‬
َ َْ ‫ىّيف‬ ِ َ‫ّه َذاّيُ ْعط‬ َ ‫ولّأَ ُك ُّل‬ ُ ‫ّعبَ َسةَّانْظُْر َّماّتَ ُق‬ َ ‫ّع ْم ُروّبْ َن‬ َ ‫ّّي‬ َ‫ت‬ ُ ْ‫فَ ُقل‬
َِ ‫ّاّللِّصلىّهللاّعليهّوسلمّولََق ْد‬ ِ ‫ّعلَىّرس‬ ِ ِ ِ ‫ّس ِنّود َنّأَجلِيّوم‬ ِ‫ت‬
ُّ‫ّْس َعْته‬ َ َّ ‫ول‬ َُ َ ‫ب‬ َ ‫اّبّم ْنّفَ ْقرّفَأَ ْكذ‬ ََ َ َ َ ْ ‫َكِ َب‬
.ّ‫ّاّللِّصلىّهللاّعليهّوسلم‬ َّ ‫ول‬ ِ ‫أُذُ َنىّوو َعاهّقَلِِْب ِّمنّرس‬
َُ ْ ُ ََ َ

'Amr bin 'Abasah said:

"I said: 'O Messenger of Allah! How is Wudu' done?' He said: 'As for Wudu', when you
perform Wudu', and you wash your hands to clean them, your sins come out from between
your fingers and fingertips. When you rinse your mouth and nostrils, and wash your face and
hands up to the elbows, and wipe your head, and wash your feet up to the ankles, you are
cleansed of all your sins. When you prostrate your face to Allah, may He be exalted, you
emerge from your sins like the day your mother bore you.'" Abu Umamah said: "I said: 'O
'Amr bin 'Abasah! Look at what you are saying! Was all of that given in one sitting? He said:
'By Allah, I have grown old, my appointed time is near and I am not so poor that I should
tell lies about the Messenger of Allah (‫)ﷺ‬. I heard it with my own ears and understood it in
my heart from the Messenger of Allah.'"

156
‫مبنّعل ّى‬ ‫اإلسم‪ّ,‬حرف‪ّ,‬فعل‬ ‫مبنّعل ّى‬ ‫اإلسم‪ّ,‬حرف‪ّ,‬فعل‬

‫‪157‬‬
CHAPTER EIGHT
Impactors of Jazm | ‫اجلوازم‬

Overview
Now that you are familiar with the concept of ‫ إعراب‬and ‫ البناء‬is it time to understand what

particles put present tense verbs into ‫جزم‬. While every present tense verb is in the state of ‫رفع‬
by default, verbs need an impactor to go into the state of ‫ جزم‬and ‫نصب‬.

In this module there is a preparation and proficiency section which are both required while
the mastery section is only highly recommended to finish. Within the preparation section we
will be focusing on the impactors of ‫ جزم‬and their meanings. These skills are extremely
important as they will be foundational tools for syntax. As usual, after completing the
required readings and videos you will be given exercises within ‫ القصصّالنبيني‬and the Quran.
After completing all the required parts you will be asked to do a reading comprehension
exercise within ‫ القصصّالنبيني‬along with enrichment exercises.

If you are able to complete all of this not only will you have mastered the parts of Arabic
speech but you will also have added a wealth of knowledge from the stories of Prophet
Ibrahim and Surah Yusuf.

158
Reading 8.1 | Impactors of ‫ الجزم‬which affect ‫ع‬
َ ‫فعلَالـمضار‬

The present tense verbs have three states: ‫رفع‬, ‫ب‬

ّ ‫نص‬, and ‫جزم‬. By default, present tense verbs
are in the state of ‫رفع‬, and they only enter into ‫ نصب‬or ‫ جزم‬due to some sort of grammatical

impact. The impactors of ‫ جزم‬are called ‫اجلوازم‬, or “the things which cause ‫جزم‬.” They can be

broken up into two groups: the ‫ جوازم‬which impact one verb, and those which impact two.

The ‫ جوازم‬which affect one verb |

‫ – لَ ْم‬The definition of this particle is: ‫حرفّنف يّوّجزمّوّقلب‬.

This roughly translates to “the particle of negation, jazm, and inversion (of tense).” The
final point, inversion, means that this particle switches the meaning of this present tense
verb to the past tense, meaning that it is used as a past tense negation.

ّ ّ‫اب‬
Zaid did not know the answer. |
ّ َ ‫ف َّزي ٌدّال َج َو‬ ْ ‫لَ ْمّيَ ْع ِر‬
ّ ّ‫ك ِز‬
Fatima did not walk to the center.ّ| ِ َ‫شّف‬
َ‫اط َمةُّإِ َىلّال َم ْر‬ ِ ‫لَ ْمّتَ ْم‬
ّ ّ‫اّيفّالغُرفَ ِة‬ ِ
They did not sit in the room.|
ْ ِ ‫ل مّيَ ْجل ُسو‬

‫ – لَ َّما‬This particle is essentially the same as the previous ‫ جازم‬except that it indicates that an
action has not yet occurred. It is very important to note that there is another ‫ لَ َّما‬which

appears with ‫( الفعلّال ماضي‬has the meaning of when), but that does not cause ‫ جزم‬because
‫ جزم‬applies to present tense verbs.

Zaid did not yet do his homework. |

ّّ ّ ُ‫لَ َّماّيَ ْف َع ْل َّزي ٌد َّو ِاجبَّه‬
Fatima did not yet walk to the center.ّ|
ّ ّ‫كز‬ ِ َ‫شّف‬
َ‫اط َمةُّإِ َىلّال َمْر‬ ِ ‫لَ َّماّتَ ْم‬
ّ ّ‫اّيفّالغُرفَ ِة‬ ِ
They did not yet sit in the room.|
ْ ِ ‫لَ َّماّيَ ْجل ُسو‬
ّ

159
‫ – ِل‬This particle is defined as: ‫المّاألمرّوّالدعاّء‬, or the “‫ الم‬or command and request.” It has two
uses: as a command for the 3rd person, or as a suggestion in the 2 nd and 1st persons.
(This differs from the particle ّ‫ ل‬which puts isms into the state of jar)

ّ‫س َّزي ٌد‬ ِ‫لِي جل‬

Let Zaid sit.|
ّ
ْ َْ
(Please) Eat.ّ| ِ
ّ ّ ‫كل‬
ْ ُ ْ‫لتَأ‬
Let’s go.ّ|
ّ ّ‫ب‬ ِ
ْ ‫لنَ ْذ َه‬

ِ َ‫ َالّالن‬, which means “the ‫ ّال‬of prohibition.” It is the opposite of

‫ – َال‬This particle is called ‫اهيَّة‬
the command tense (‫)األمر‬. This looks very similar to the ‫ ال‬which is a negation
(meaning that the verb did not occur) however the way to tell the difference between
the ‫ الّالناهية‬and the ‫ ال‬of negation is that the latter does not create ‫جزم‬.

Don’t be rude in front of your parents. |

ّ ّ ّ‫يك‬َ ‫َالّتُ ْغلِ ْظّأ ََم َامّأَبَ َو‬
Don’t open the door (you two).| ّ ّ‫اب‬
َ َ‫َالّتَ ْفتَ َحاّالب‬
ّ ّ‫شّزي ٌدّيفّال مط ِر‬
Don’t let Zaid walk in the rain.| ِ ‫َالّيَ ْم‬
َ
‫ الطلب‬Construction
This sentence structure is made up of two parts:
1. Either a ‫فعلّأمر‬, or a ‫( ن هي‬using the ‫ ال‬above), or an ‫( استفهام‬a question).
2. ‫فعلّمضارعّم جزوم‬.
This structure always has an implication (meaning cause and effect) of some sort and
refers to the ‫‘ مستقبل‬future’.

ّ ّ‫سّتَنْ َج ْح‬
Study, (if you do) you’ll succeed. |
ّ
ْ ‫اُْد ُر‬
ّ ّ‫نّتَسلَم‬ ِ
Don’t smoke, (if you don’t) you’ll be safe (healthy).|
ْ ْ ْ ‫َالّتُ َدخ‬
ّ ّ‫ك‬َ ‫ب َّم َع‬
When will you go? (if you tell me) I’ll go with you.|
ْ ‫ب؟ّأَ ْذ َه‬ ُ ‫َم َتّتَ ْذ َه‬
160
The ‫ جوازم‬that impact two verbs | The following sentence structure causes ‫ جزم‬of two
verbs.

‫ط‬
ّ ‫ الشر‬Construction – This structure is one of the ways in Arabic to make a conditional
statement, and is made up of three parts: a ‫ط‬
ّ ‫‘ أداةّالشر‬conditional tool’, a ‫ط‬
ّ ‫فعلّالشر‬
‘conditional action’, and a ‫ط‬
ّ ‫‘ جوابّالشر‬conditional response’. The latter two are verbs
and can appear in many ways, including as a present tense verb in ‫جزم‬.

‫جواب الشرط‬ ‫فعل الشرط‬ ‫أدوات الشرط‬

‫الفعلّاملضارعّامل جزوم‬
This is a
‫‘ إن‬if’ ّ‫حرف‬
‫الفعلّاملاض ّي‬
‫فعلّمضارعّم جزوم‬ ‫‘ ما‬whatever’
The following need a ‫ ف‬before it:

‫الفعل األمر‬ ‫‘ من‬whoever’

‫اجلملة االس ميِّة‬ ‫فعلّماض‬ ‫‘ مت‬whenever’

‫اجلملة الفعليِّة‬
‫‘ أين ما‬wherever’

Whoever reads learns.|

ّ ّ‫إِ ْنّتَ ْقَرأّْتَتَ َعلَّ ْم‬
ّ Whoever reads learns.|ّ ّ‫َم ْنّقَ َرأَّتَ َعلَّ َم‬

In the ‫الشرط‬ ‫جواب‬, the final three choices must be preceded by the letter ‫ف‬
َ.

ّ Whoever shows up, honor him.|

ّ ُّ‫ضَرّفَأَ ْك ِرْمه‬
َ ‫ّح‬
َ ‫َم ْن‬
ّ‫ين‬ ِِ ِ
َ ‫َّنَ َحّفَ ُه َوّم ْنّال ُم ْجتَهد‬
َ ‫ ّ| َم ْن‬Whoever succeeds, then he is from the hard workers.
161
Exercise 8.1 | Understanding the Impactors of ‫جز َم‬
Instructions | Please fill in the following table giving the meanings of each of the ‫ جوازم‬and
providing an example.

‫اجلازم‬ Meaning Example and Translation

Did not

‫ل ما‬
1st and 2nd person suggestion or
polite request; 3rd person command

‫ال‬

What are the five ‫ أدواتّالشرط‬that are learned in this class?

‫أي نم ا‬

Use one of the ‫ط‬

ّ ‫ أدواتّالشر‬above in an example, and provide a translation:

What is a ‫ طلب‬and ‫ جوابّالطلب‬construction?

Please provide an example of a ‫ طلب‬and ‫ جوابّالطلب‬and translate:

162
Exercise 8.2 | Practice with the Impactors of ‫جزم‬
Instructions | Translate the following sentences which contain ‫جوازم‬. You may have to use
the dictionary to look up some words. The first example has been done for you.

Sentence Translation

ّ‫اب‬ ّ ّ‫لََّّمّيَّّتََّذ َّّك ّْرَّّزي ٌّد‬

َ ‫اجلََّو‬ Zaid did not know the answer.

‫َوال ُدّطَ َع َام ُه ّْم‬

َ ‫اَّي ُك ْلّاأل‬ َ ‫لَ َّم‬
ّ‫س‬
َ ‫ّالد ْر‬
َ ‫س‬ َ ْ‫الّتَن‬
ِ ‫لِتَ ْجلِسو‬
ّ‫اّيفّالغُْرفَِة‬ ُ
‫لَ ْمّيَْن تَ ِظ ْر َّزي ٌّد‬
‫ص َّل‬ ِ ِ
ْ ‫لتَ ْقَرأّْفَاط َمةُّال َف‬
ِّ ‫اك ِّمنّاللَ ْع‬
‫ب‬ َ ‫َخ‬َ ‫الّتَ ْمنَ ْعّأ‬
‫اّص ِدي َق ُكم‬
َ ‫ورو‬
ُ ‫أَلَ َّماّتَ ُز‬

Directions | Translate the following sentences using the ‫ جوازم‬structures. You may have to
use the dictionary to look up some words. The first example has been done for you.

Sentence Translation

‫َماّتَ ْد ُر ِسيّتَتَ َعلَّ ِم ّي‬ Whatever you (sing. fem) study, you will
learn.
ّ‫ك‬ َ ‫َّيْ ُك ْل َّزي ٌد‬
َ ‫ّم َع‬ َ ‫اَّتْ ُك ْلّالطَ َع َام‬
َ ‫أَينَ َم‬
ِ ِِ
َ ‫إِ ْنّأَفْ َش ْل ِّيفّاال ْمت َحانّفَأَِب‬
ّ‫ّسيَ ْحَز ُن‬
‫ح‬ َ ‫ّص ِدي َق‬
ّْ ‫كّيَ ْف َر‬ َ ‫ب‬ ْ ‫ض ِر‬
ْ َ‫الّت‬
َِ ‫اِْق رُؤواّال ُكتُب‬
‫َّت ُدواّالعِلْ َمّفِ َيها‬ َ َ

163
Reading Comprehension #8 | Prophet Ibrahim

Instructions | Answer the following questions from Prophet Ibrahim Section 15. You may
use Hans Wehr as an aid.

Answer the questions on separate sheets of paper or on this document and send it back to
the course via the instructions posted in the assignment link.

Section 16

1. What did Ibrahim want to do after returning?

2. Why did he want to do so?

3. How did Ibrahim and Ismael build it?

4. What are the three things Muslims do around what he built?

164
Translation #8 | Prophet Ibrahim
Instructions | Read Section 15 of Prophet Ibrahim. Use Hans Wehr as an aid to help you
in translating.

_____________________________________________________________________

165
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

166
Apply #14 | Hadith on particles of ‫جز َم‬
Instructions | Identify the particles of ‫ جزم‬in the following ahādīth and the signs of ‫ جزم‬for
the present tense verbs after them.

ِ ‫ لِي ؤِذ ْنّلَ ُكم‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬

ّ ‫ّخيَ ُارُك ّْم‬ ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
ْ َُ
Let the more virtuous of you call you to prayer.

َّ ‫َّتْذُنُواّلِ َم ْنّلَ ْمّيَْب َدأّْ ِِب‬

ّ‫لس َالِم‬ َ ‫ َال‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬
ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
Do not admit [to a place] those who do not begin with salam.

ُّ ‫َّاسّيُ ْحبِْب ُك ْمّالن‬ ِ ‫ّازه ْدّفِيم‬ ِ ِ ِ ُّ ‫الّرس‬

‫َّاس‬ ِ ‫اّعْن َدّالن‬ َ َ ْ ‫ ا ْزَه ْد ِّيفّالدُّنْيَاّيُ ْحبْب ُكمّهللاُ َّو‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
Exercise abstinence from the world and Allāh will love you, and abstain from what people have and
they will love you.

ّ ‫اّو َّالّتُ َع ِس ُروا‬ ِ ‫ ب ِشروا ّ ّو َالّتُنَ ِفرو‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬

َ ‫اّوّيَس ُرو‬
َ ُ َ ُْ َ ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
Give glad tidings [to the people] and do not frighten [them] away, and create ease and do not create
difficulty.

ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬
َ ‫كّفََالّتَ ْف َعلْهُّبِنَ ْف ِس‬
ّ‫ك‬ َ ْ‫َّاس ِّمن‬ َ ‫ َماّ َك ِرْه‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬
ُ ‫تّأَ ْنّيََرآهُّالن‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
Whatever you would not dislike people to see from you, then do not do that thing in private.

ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬
ّ‫ت‬
ّْ ‫ص ُم‬ َ ‫ َم ْنّيُ ْؤم ْنّ ِِبلل َّوّاليَومّاَلخ ِرّفَلْيَ ُق ْل‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬
ْ َ‫ّخرياّأ َْوّل ي‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
Whoever believes in Allāh and the last day, then let him say good [things] or be silent.

167
‫اجلوازم‬ ‫)‪ (signs‬العَلمات‬

‫‪168‬‬
Mastery #8 | Particles of ‫ جزم‬in Sūra Yūsuf
Instructions | Read the following verses from Sūra Yūsuf in the order given below.
Identify the present tense verbs that are being impacted and fill them into the table. The
first example has already been completed. Note that there may be more boxes than needed.
Verses | 5, 67, 69, 87, 10, 12, 77, 90, 54, 63, 93, 52, 40, 60, 9, 33, 16

‫معىن الفعل و جازمه‬ ‫اجلازمة‬ ‫عَلمة جزمه‬

‘Meaning of the verb combined with ‫الفعل املضارع‬ Verse
its impactor’ ‘Impactor of ‫’جزم‬ ‘Sign of ‫’جزم‬

“Don’t relate…” ّ ‫ال‬ ‫السكون‬ ّ ‫تقصص‬ 5

ّ ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ

169
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ

170
CHAPTER NINE
Impactors of Nasb | ‫النواصب‬

Overview
Now that you are familiar with the concept of ‫ إعراب‬and ‫ البناء‬is it time to understand what

particles put present tense verbs into ‫نصب‬. While every present tense verb is in the state of
‫ رفع‬by default, verbs need an impactor to go into the state of ‫ جزم‬and ‫ب‬
ّ ‫نص‬.
In this module there is a preparation and proficiency section which are both required while
the mastery section is only highly recommended to finish. Within the preparation section we
will be focusing on the impactors of ‫ب‬
ّ ‫ نص‬and their meanings. These skills are extremely
important as they will be foundational tools for syntax. As usual, after completing the
required readings and videos you will be given exercises within ‫ القصصّالنبيني‬and the Quran.
After completing all the required parts you will be asked to do a reading comprehension
exercise within ‫ القصصّالنبيني‬along with enrichment exercises.

If you are able to complete all of this not only will you have mastered the parts of Arabic
speech but you will also have added a wealth of knowledge from the stories of Prophet
Ibrahim and Surah Yusuf.

171
Reading 9.1| Particles of ‫ نصب‬which affect the َ‫الفعل‬
‫ع‬
َ ‫الـمضار‬
The present tense verb is in the state of ‫ رفع‬by default. The previous section (the ‫ )جوازم‬is
about what puts the present tense verb in the state of ‫جزم‬. These following are the

impactors which cause the state of ‫ نصب‬to present tense verbs; they are collectively called

‫النواصب‬, or “the things which cause ‫ب‬

ّ ‫نص‬.”

‫َن‬
ْ ‫ – ل‬The definition of this particle is: ‫حرفّنف يّوّنصبّوّاستقبال‬
This roughly translates to “the particle of negation, nasb, and future (in tense). Hence, it
is used as a future tense negation, though it impacts the present tense verb.

ِ ‫لَنّأَ ْذهبّإِ َىلّالس‬

ّ‫وق‬
I will not go to the market.|
ّ
ُ َ َ ْ
ّ ّ‫اس ِة‬ ِ ِ ‫لَنّيكْسلُو‬
They will not be lazy in studying.|
َ ‫اّيفّالد َر‬ َ َْ
ِ
َ ِ ‫لَ ْنّتَ ْمش َي‬
ّ ّ‫ّيفّال مط ِر‬
She will not walk in the rain.|

‫ – أَ ْن‬The definition of this particle is: ‫حرفّمصدرّوّنصب‬

This is a very interesting particle. It forms a ‫ مصدر‬along with a verb following it.

However, a ‫ مصدر‬is actually an ‫ اسم‬therefore this means that the particle ‫ أن‬along with a

‫ فعلّمضارع‬can act like an ‫ اسم‬does in a sentence, for example it can be a subject or

direct object. It is important to note that ‫ أَ ْن‬or the verb by itself are not isms. Rather the

combination of the two creates its own pseudo-entity which can act like a ‫ مصدر‬which
is an ism.

ّ I want to study.|ّ ّ‫س‬ ُ ‫أُِر‬

َ ‫يدّأَ ْنّأ َْد ُر‬
ّ ّ‫حوا‬ ِ ‫الطَُّال‬
The students like to succeed.|
ْ ُ ‫بّيُحبُّو َنّأَ ْنّيَنْ َج‬ ُ
Your working hard is good for you.| ّ ّ‫كم‬ َ ‫أَ ْنّتَ ْجتَ ِه ُد ْو‬
ْ ُ َ‫اّخريٌّل‬

172
‫– لِ َكيّ ّ\ّ َح ََّت‬These two particles are defined as ‫ حرفّتعليلّوّنصب‬which roughly translates
to “giving a reason and causing the state of ‫نصب‬.” This is commonly translated as “in

order to”. The particle ‫كي‬ َ ِ‫ ل‬can be shortened into its constituent parts, ‫ ِل‬and ‫ َكي‬,
and still perform the same function of making the ‫ فعلّمضارع‬after it in the state of
‫نصب‬.
َّ‫ّالعَربِيَّة‬ ِ ‫أ َْدر‬
I study in order to understand Arabic.|
ّ َ ‫سّل َكيّأَفْ َه َم‬ُُ
I cook in order to feed my family.| ّ ّ‫َهلِي‬ ِ
ْ ‫أَطْبُ ُخّالطَ َع َامّ َك ْيّأُطْع َمّأ‬
ِ ‫اعدّال ُف َقر‬
ّ ّ‫اء‬ ِ
We give charity in order to help the poor.|
َ َ ‫ّح َّتّنُ َس‬ َ ‫ص َّد ُق‬َ َ‫نَت‬

‫ – َح ََّت‬This particle is identical in spelling as the previous ّ‫ حت‬but has a different meaning.
This ّ‫ حت‬means “until” and still performs the same function of creating ‫نصب‬.

ّ‫ّح َّتّتَ ْس َم َعّا ِإل ْع َال َن‬ ِ ِ

Sit until you hear the announcement.|
ّ َ ‫س‬ ْ ‫ا ْجل‬
ّ ّ‫كم‬ُ ‫اّح َّتّأَطْبُ َغّطَ َع َام‬ ِ ِ
Wait until I cook your food.|
َ ‫انْتَظ ُرو‬
Amr is happy until Zaid comes.| َ َ‫َّيِِْت‬
ّ ّ‫ّزي ٌد‬ َ ‫ّح َّت‬َ ‫ور‬ ٌ ‫َع ْم ٌرو َّم ْس ُر‬

‫ فاءّالسببيِّة‬- This particle resembles the ‫ طلب‬construction from the ‫ جوازم‬section very

closely. It must be preceded by either an ‫أمر‬, ‫ي‬

ّ ‫ِن‬, or ‫استفهام‬. However it makes the
verb after it ‫ب‬
ّ ‫منصو‬, and answers the question “why?” should the ‫أمر‬, ‫ِن ّي‬, or ‫ استفهام‬be
fulfilled, rather than the cause and effect implication of the ‫ طلب‬construction.

ّ‫سّفَتَ ْس ََِتي َح‬ ِ ِ

Sit so that you may relax.|
ّ
ْ ‫ا ْجل‬
Don’t play with fire because you will be burned.| ّ ّ‫ق‬ َ ‫بّ ِِبلنَّا ِرّفَتَ ْحََِت‬
ْ ‫َالّتَلْ َع‬
ّ ّ‫َزورَك‬
Where do you live? (so that) I may visit you.|
َ ُ ‫َينّتَ ْس ُك ُنّفَأ‬َ‫أ‬

173
Exercise 9.1 | ‫ب‬
َ ‫النواص‬
Instructions | Please fill in the following table giving the meanings of each of the ‫ نواصب‬and
providing an example.

‫الناصبة‬ Meaning Example and Translation

ّ‫أَ ْن‬

Will not

ّ‫ِلّ–ّّ َك ْيّ–ّلِ َك ْيّ–ّ َحت‬

Until

What meaning does the ‫ فاءّالسببية‬create? Outline the structure of how it is used.

Provide an example of ‫ فاءّالسببية‬in a sentence and translate:

174
Exercise 9.2 | Exercise on the Particles of ‫ب‬
َ ‫نص‬
Instructions | Translate the following sentences which contain ‫نواصب‬. You may have to
use the dictionary to look up some words. The first example has been done for you.

Sentence Translation

‫س َّزي ٌدّ َعلَىّال ُكْر ِس ِّي‬ ِ َ ‫لَن‬

َ ‫َّيل‬
ْ ْ Zaid will not sit on the chair.

‫ب‬
َّ ‫ّح َّتّأَتْ َع‬
َ ‫س‬ ُ ‫أ َْد ُر‬
‫اط َمةُّلِ َك ْيّتَتَ َعلَّ َّم‬
ِ َ‫تَ ْقرأُّف‬
َ
‫ك‬ َ ‫َّيْ ُك َل‬
َّ ‫ّالس َم‬ َ ‫ّع ْمٌرّأَ ْن‬
َ ُ‫يَك َْره‬
َّ ِ‫ّح َّتّيُّّْت ِقنُواّالع‬
‫لم‬ َ ‫بّيُ َما ِر ُسو َن‬
ُ ‫الطَُّال‬
‫ورّلِتَ ْن ُم َّو‬
َ ‫يّالزُه‬
ُ ‫َسق‬
ِ ‫أ‬
ْ

Instructions | Translate the following sentences using the ‫ فاءّالسببية‬structures. You may have
to use the dictionary to look up some words. The first example has been done for you.

Sentence Translation

ّ‫ب‬
َ ‫الّتَ ْس َح ْرّفَتَ ْت َع‬ Don’t stay up late, because you’ll get tired.

‫الَّتْ ُك ْلّقَ ْب َلّالنَ ِومّفَتَ ْس ُم َّن‬

َ
ّ‫لم‬ِ ‫اُْدرسّ َكثِرياّفَي ثْ ب‬
ُ ‫تّالع‬ ََُ ُْ
ُ ‫الّتَلْ َعبُواّيفّال َمطَ ِرّفَتَ ْمَر‬
ّ‫ضوا‬
ّ‫ّعلىّالش َدائِ ِدّفَتَ ِج َدّال َف َوائِ َد‬ ‫صِ ْب‬ِ
َ ْ‫ا‬

175
Exercise 9.3 | Exercise on particles of ‫ب‬
َ ‫نص‬
Identify the particles of ‫ نصب‬in the following ahādīth and the signs of ‫ نصب‬for the present
tense verbs after them.

ّ ّ‫اّح َّتّتَ ْخلََف ُك ْم‬ ِ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬

َ َ‫ومواّ ََل‬
ُ ‫اّرأَيتُ ْمّاجلَنَ َازَةّفَ ُق‬
َ ‫ إ َذ‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
If you see a funeral procession, stand for it until it passes you by.

ِ ُ ‫ّعلْما‬ ِ ‫ّالص َدقَِةّأَ ْنّي تَ علَّمّال مرءّال مسلِم‬ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬

ُ‫َخ ّاه‬
َ ‫ّثَّّيُ َعل ُمهُّأ‬ ُ ْ ُ َُْ َ َ َ َّ ُ‫ضل‬
َ ْ‫ أَف‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
The best charity is that a Muslim acquires knowledge and then teaches it to his brother.

ِ ِ ‫بّإِ َذ‬ ِ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬

ُ‫َح ُد ُك ّْمّ َع َمالّأَ ْنّيُْتقنَّه‬ َ ُّ ‫ إِ َّنّهللاَّيُح‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬
َ ‫اّعم َلّأ‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
Verily Allāh loves if one of you does a task that he does it skillfully.

ّ ‫َح ّد‬ ِ ِ ُ ‫الّرس‬

َ ‫ّعلَىّأ‬
َ ‫َح ٌد‬
َ ‫َحد َّو َّالّيَ ْف َخَرّأ‬
َ ‫ّعلَىّأ‬
َ ‫َح ٌد‬
َ ‫اّح َّت َّالّيَْبغ َيّأ‬
َ ‫اضعُو‬
َ ‫ تَ َو‬: ‫ولّهللاّﷺ‬ ُ َ َ َ‫ق‬
Be humble with one another until none of you oppresses another and [until] none belittles
another.

َّ َ‫هللاُّ َّوّيَّّْب ّتَّلِّي‬

ّ‫ك‬ َّ ‫الش َّماّتَّةَِّّألَ ِّخ‬
ّ ُّ‫يكّّفََّْري َّح َّم ّه‬ َّ ّ‫ َّالّّتُ ّظْ ِّه ّْر‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬
ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
Do not rejoice over your brother’s affliction for Allāh may have mercy on him and afflict
you.

ّ ‫ّالدنْيَّا‬ ِ ‫اّالض َيعةَّفََ َْت َغبُو‬

ُ ‫اّيف‬ ِ ‫ َالّتَت‬: ‫ولّهللاِّﷺ‬
َ ‫َّخ ُذو‬ ُ ‫ال َّر ُس‬
َ َ‫ق‬
Do not own large estates so that you begin to desire this world.

176
‫النواصب‬ ‫)‪ (signs‬العَلمات‬

‫‪177‬‬
Reading Comprehension #9 | Prophet Ibrahim

Instructions | Answer the following questions from Prophet Ibrahim Section 16. You may
use Hans Wehr as an aid.

Answer the questions on separate sheets of paper or on this document and send it back to
the course via the instructions posted in the assignment link.

Section 16

1. Who is Sara?

2. Who is Ishaq?

3. What did Ishaq and Ibrahim build?

4. Explain the lineage from Ibrahim to Yusuf.

178
Translation #9 | Prophet Ibrahim
Instructions | Read Section 16 of Prophet Ibrahim. Use Hans Wehr as an aid to help you
in translating.

_____________________________________________________________________

179
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

180
Apply #15 | Exercise on particles of ‫ب‬
َ ‫نص‬
Identify the particles of ‫ نصب‬in the following ayat and ahādīth and the signs of ‫ نصب‬for the
present tense verbs after them.

َ َ‫ض َّولَ ْنّتَ ْب لُ َغّا ْجلِب‬

37ّ:‫الّطُوالّ﴾ّاإلسراء‬ ْ ‫َّّتْ ِر َق‬
َ ‫ّاأل َْر‬ َ ‫﴿ّإِن‬
َ ‫َّكّلَ ْن‬
99ّ:‫نيّ﴾ّاحلجر‬ ِ َ ‫كّح َّتَّيْتِي‬
ُ ‫كّالْيَق‬ َ َ َ َ َّ‫﴿ّ َو ْاعبُ ْد َّرب‬
40ّ:‫﴾ّالنمل‬ ّ ّ‫﴿ّلِيَ ْب لَُوِنّأَأَ ْش ُك ُرّأ َْمّأَ ْك ُف ُر‬
84ّ:‫ضىّ﴾ّطه‬ ِ ِ ‫كّر‬ ِ ُ ‫﴿ّو َع ِج ْل‬
َ ‫بّل َ َْت‬ َ َ ‫تّإلَّْي‬ َ
92ّ:‫َّاَّتبُّو َنّ﴾ّآلّعمران‬ ُِ ‫اَّم‬ ِ ‫﴿ّلَنّت نالُواّالِْبَّّح َّتّت ْن ِف ُقو‬
ُ َ ََ ْ

ُّ ‫تّأَ ّْنّيَطَّلِ َّعّ َعلَْي ِّهّالن‬

‫َّاس‬ َّ ‫يفّنَ ْف ِس‬
َّ ‫كّ َوَك ِرْه‬ َّ ‫الِْ ّبُّّ ُح ْس ُّنّا ْخلُلُ ِّقّ َوا ِإل ّْثُّ َماّ َح‬
ّ ِّ‫اك‬
Virtue is a kind disposition and vice is what rankles in your mind and that you disapprove
of its being known to the people.

ِ ‫ولّمنّي ْدع ِونّفَأ‬ ِ ِ ِ َّ ‫اىلّ ُكلَّّلَي لَةّإِ َىل‬

ّ‫يب‬
َ ‫َستَج‬
ْ ُ َ ْ َ ُّ ‫ثّاللَّْي ِلّاَلخ ُرّفَيَّ ُق‬
ُ ُ‫نيّيَْب َقىّثُل‬
َ ‫ّالس َماءّالدُّنْيَاّح‬ ْ َ ‫يَنْ ِزُل َّربُّنَاّتَبَ َار َك َّوتَ َع‬
ُّ‫لَهُ َّوَم ْنّيَ ْسأَلُِنّفَأ ُْع ِطيَهُ َّوَم ْنّيَ ْستَ غْ ِف ُرِنّفَأَ ْغ ِف َرّلَه‬
Our Lord, the Blessed and the Exalted, descends every night to the lowest heaven when
one-third of the latter part of the night is left, and says: Who supplicates Me so that I may
answer him? Who asks Me so that I may give to him? Who asks Me forgiveness so that I
may forgive him?

ّ‫الَّيلّملسلمّأنّيقيمّعندّأخيهّحتّيؤمثّهّقالوّاّّيّرسولّهللاّّوكيفّيؤمثّهّقالّيقيمّعندهّوال‬
‫شيءّلهّيقريهّبه‬
Messenger of Allah (‫ )ﷺ‬said, "It is not permissible for a Muslim to stay so long with his
brother till he makes him sinful." He was asked: "O Messenger of Allah, how can he
make him sinful?" He replied, "He prolongs his stay with him till nothing is left with the
host to entertain him (guest)."

‫ّأوّسيدةّنساءّهذهّاألمة‬،‫نّسيدةّنساءّاملؤمنني‬
ّ ‫ّيّفاطمةّأماّترضنيّأنّتكو‬
'O Fatimah, are you not pleased that you will be the chief among the believing women or
of this Ummah?'

181
‫النواصب‬ ‫)‪ (signs‬العَلمات‬

‫‪182‬‬
Apply #16 | Analyzing Sūra al-Kahf
Identify every word related to the Ten Forms, the signs of ‘Irāb for ‘isms and present tense
verbs, as well as the Nawāsib and the Jawāzim. (All translations are from A.J. Arberry’s
translation).

ِ ‫ّوّعلَّمنَاه ِّمنّلَّ ُدن‬

ّ ٦٥﴿ّ‫َّّعلْما‬ ِ ِ ِ ّ ‫ّعب ِاد َنّآتَي نَاه‬
ِ ِ
﴾ ُ ْ َ ّ ‫ّر ْحَةّم ْنّعند َن‬
َ ُ ْ َ ‫اّعْبداّم ْن‬
َ َ ‫فَو َج َد‬ َ
And they found a servant from among Our servants to whom we had given mercy from us and
had taught him from Us a [certain] knowledge.

ِ ِ ِ
ّ ٦٦﴿ّ‫شدا‬
﴾ ْ ‫ّر‬
ّ‫ت‬ َ ‫ّعلَىّأَنّتُ َعلم ِنَّمَّاّعُل ْم‬
ُ َ َ ‫ك‬َ ُ‫ّهلّأَتَّبِع‬
َ ‫وسى‬
َ ‫ّم‬
ُ ُ‫الّلَه‬
ْ َ َ‫ق‬
Moses said to him, "May I follow you on [the condition] that you teach me from what you have
been taught of sound judgement?"

ّ ٦٧﴿ّ‫با‬
ّْ ‫ّص‬ ِ ‫َّكّلَنّتَستَ ِط‬
َ ‫الّإِن‬
﴾ َ ‫يع َّمعي‬
ََ َ َ‫ق‬ ْ
Said he, 'Assuredly thou wilt not be able to bear with me patiently.

ِ ُِ ‫ّوّّ َكيفّتَصِ ّبّعلَىّماّ َل‬

ّ ٦٨﴿ّ‫با‬
﴾ ُ ‫َّت ْطّبِه‬
ّْ ‫ّخ‬ ْ َ َ ْ َْ ُ َ
And how shouldst thou bear patiently that thou hast never encompassed in thy knowledge?'

ِ ‫نّشاءّاللَّهّصابِّراّوَالّأ َْع‬ ِ ‫ال‬

ّ ّ‫َم ّرا‬
﴾٦٩﴿ ْ ‫كّأ‬
َ َ‫صيّل‬ َ ُ َ ِ‫ّستَج ُدِنّإ‬
َ َ َ َ‫ّق‬
َ
He said, 'Yet thou shalt find me, if Allāh will, patient; and I shall not rebel against thee in
anything.'

ِ ‫ك ِّمْنه‬ َ ‫ُح ِد‬

ّ ٧٠﴿ّ‫كرّا‬
﴾ ْ ‫ّذ‬ُ َ َ‫ثّل‬ ْ ‫ّح َّتّأ‬
َ ‫نّشيء‬
َ ‫ّع‬َ ‫الّفَِإ ِنّاتَّبَ ْعتَ ِنّفََالّتَسأَلِْن‬
ْ ْ َ َ‫ّق‬
Said he, 'Then if thou followest me, question me not on anything until I myself introduce the
mention of it to thee.'

ّ ٧١﴿ّ‫ّشْي ئاّإِ ْم ّرا‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ َّ ‫اّيف‬

ِ َ‫اّح َّتّإِ َذاّ ّركِب‬
﴾ َ ‫ت‬َ ‫َخ ّرقْتَ َهاّلتُ ْغ ِّر َقّأ َْهلَ َهاّلََق ْدّجْئ‬
َ َ ‫الّأ‬
َ َ‫ّخ ّرقَ َهاّق‬
َ َ ‫ّالسفينَة‬ َ َ ‫ّفَانطَلَ َق‬
So they departed; until, when they embarked upon the ship, he made a hole in it. He said, 'What,
hast thou made a hole in it so as to drown its passengers? Thou hast indeed done a grievous
thing.'
ّ
ّ

183
ّ﴾٧٢﴿ّ‫با‬
ّْ ‫ّص‬ ِ ‫َّكّلَنّتَستَ ِط‬
َ ‫الّأََلّْأَقُلّإِن‬
َ ‫يع َّمعي‬
َ َ ْ َ َ‫ق‬ ْ
Said he, 'Did I not say that thou couldst never bear with me patiently?'

ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ
ّ﴾٧٣﴿ّ‫َم ِّريّعُس ّرا‬
ْ ْ ‫ّوَّالّتُ ّره ْق ِنّم ْنّأ‬
ْ ُ ‫ال َّالّتُ َؤاخ ْذِنِّبَاّنَس‬
ّ ‫يت‬ َ َ َ‫ق‬
He said, 'Do not take me to task that I forgot, neither constrain me to do a thing too difficult.'

ِ َ َ‫اّح َّتّإِذَاّلَِقيَاّغُ َالماّفَ َقتَ لَهُّق‬

ِ َ ‫الّأَقَتَّلْتّنَ ْفس‬
ّ﴾٧٤﴿ّ‫ّشْي ئاّنُّكْرّا‬
َ ‫ت‬َ ْ‫اّزكيَّةّبِغَ ِّْريّنَ ْفسّلََّق ْدّجئ‬ َ َ ‫فَان ٌّْطَلَ َق‬
So they departed; until, when they met a lad, he slew him. He said, 'What, hast thou slain a soul
innocent, and that not to retaliate for a soul slain? Thou hast indeed done a horrible thing.'

ّ ٧٥﴿ّ‫با‬
ّْ ‫ّص‬ ِ ‫َّكّلَنّتَستَ ِط‬
َ ‫كّإِن‬
َ َّ‫الّأََلّْأَقُلّل‬
ّ﴾ َ ‫يع َّمعي‬
َ َ ْ َ َ‫ق‬
Said he, 'Did I not say that thou couldst never bear with me patiently?'

ُ َّ‫ت ِّمنّل‬
ّ﴾٧٦﴿ّ‫دِنّعُ ْذ ّرا‬ ِ ُ‫نّشيءّب ع َدهاّفََالّت‬
َ ‫صاحْب ِنّقَ ْدّبَلَ ْغ‬
َ َ ْ َ َ ‫ّع‬ َ ‫ك‬ َ ِ‫الّإ‬
َ ُ‫نّسأَلْت‬
ْ َ َ‫ّق‬
He said, 'If I question thee on anything after this, then keep me company no more; thou hast
already experienced excuse sufficient on my part.'

ِ ‫وَهاّفَوج َداّفِيه‬
ّ‫ض‬ ُ ‫اّج َد ّاراّيُِّر‬
َّ ‫يدّأَنّيَنّْ َق‬ َ َ َ َُ ‫ضيِ ُف‬ ْ ‫اّح َّتّإِذَاّأَتَيَاّأ َْه َلّقَ ّْريَة‬
َ ُ‫ّاستَطْ َع َماّأ َْهلَ َهاّفَأَبَ ْواّأَنّي‬ َ ‫فَاّنْطَلَ َق‬
ّ﴾٧٧﴿ّ‫َج ّرا‬ ِ ‫ّشْئت َّال ََّّتَ ْذت‬ ِ َ َ‫فَأَقَامهّق‬
ْ ‫ّعلَْيهّأ‬
َ َ َ ‫الّلَ ْو‬ َُ
So they departed; until, when they reached the people of a city, they asked the people for food,
but they refused to receive them hospitably. There they found a wall about to tumble down, and
so he set it up. He said, 'If thou hadst wished, thou couldst have taken a wage for that.'

ّ ٧٨﴿ّ‫با‬
﴾ ّْ ‫ّص‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫كّبِتَأْ ِو ِيل َّماّ َلّْتَستَطعّعَّلَْيه‬
ْ َّ ِ‫ّه َذاّفِ ّرا ُقّبَْي ِنّوبَْين‬
َ ُ‫كّ َسأُنَبِئ‬ َ َ َ ‫ال‬
َ َ‫ق‬
Said he, 'This is the parting between me and thee. Now I will tell thee the interpretation of that
thou couldst not bear patiently.

ّ
ّ

184
ّ‫َّيْ ُخ ُذّ ُك َّل‬
َ‫ك‬ ٌ ِ‫ّوَّراءَ ُه ّْمّ َمل‬ َّ ‫دتّأَ ْنّأ َِعيبَ َه‬
َ ‫اّوّ َكا َن‬ ُّ ‫نيّيَ ْع َملُو َن ِّيفّالْبَ ْح ِّرّفَأ ََّر‬ ِ ِ َ‫اّالس ِفينَةُّفَ َكان‬
َ ‫تّل َم َساك‬
ْ َّ ‫ّأ ََّم‬
﴾٧٩﴿ّ‫صبا‬ ِ
ْ ‫َسفينَةّ َغ‬
As for the ship, it belonged to certain poor men, who toiled upon the sea; and I desired to
damage it, for behind them there was a king who was seizing every ship by brutal force.

ُ‫نيّفَ َخ ِشينَاّأَنّيُّر ِه َق ُهماّطُ ْغيَانّو‬

ّ ٨٠﴿ّ‫ك ْفرّا‬
﴾
َ َ ْ ِ ْ َ‫ّم ْؤِمن‬
ُ ُ‫ّ ّوّأ ََّماّالْغَُالمُّفَ َكا َنّأَبَواه‬
َ َ
As for the lad, his parents were believers; and we were afraid he would impose on them
insolence and unbelief;

ّ﴾٨١﴿ّ‫حا‬
ْ ‫ّر‬
ّ‫ب‬ ِ ‫اّر َُّبماّخ ّري‬ ِ
َ ‫ّوّأَقْ ّر‬
ُ ّ ‫اّمْنهُ َّزَكاة‬
َ َ ْ َ ُ ّ ‫ّفَأ َّر ْد َنّأَنّيُْبد ََلُم‬
َ َ َ َ
So we desired that their Lord should give to them in exchange one better than he in purity, and
nearer in tenderness.

ّ‫ك‬ ِ ‫وَهاّص‬ َّ ‫َّتتَهُّ َك ٌنز‬ َّ ‫ني ِّيفّالْ َم ِدينَ ِة‬

ِ ْ ‫يم‬ِ ِ ‫ّوّأ ََّماّا ْجلِ َد ّارّفَ َكا َنّلِغَُالم‬
َ ُّ‫ّرب‬
َّ ‫احلاّفَأ ََّر َاد‬ َ َُ ُ‫اّوّ َكا َنّأَب‬ َّ ‫َّلَُم‬ َْ ‫ّوّ َكا َن‬ َ ‫نيّيَت‬َْ ُ َ
ّ‫ّماّ َلّْتَ ْس ِطع‬ ِ ِ ‫اّر ْحة‬
َ ُ‫َّتْ ِويل‬
َ‫ك‬ َ ‫ّع ْنّأ َْم ِّريّ ذَل‬
َ ُ‫ّو ّ َماّفَ َعلْتُه‬ َ ِ‫نّرب‬
َّ ‫ك‬ َّّ ‫ّم‬ َ َّ َ‫ََّهَا ّ َّو ّيَ ْستَ ْخ ِّر َجاّ َك َنزَُه‬
ُ ‫َشد‬ُ ‫أَنّيَْب لُغَاّأ‬
ّ ٨٢﴿ّ‫با‬ ّْ ‫ّص‬ ِ
﴾ َ ‫َّعلَْيه‬
As for the wall, it belonged to two orphan lads in the city, and under it was a treasure belonging
to them. Their father was a righteous man; and thy Lord desired that they should come of age
and then bring forth their treasure as a mercy from thy Lord. I did it not of my own bidding.
ّ This is the interpretation of that thou couldst not bear patiently.'

185
Mastery #9َ| Particles of ‫ نصب‬in Sūra Yūsuf
Read the following verses from Sūra Yūsuf in the order given below. Identify the present
tense verbs that are being impacted by these particles and fill them into the table. The first
example has already been completed. Note that there may be more boxes than needed.
Verses | 13, 21, 25, 5, 37, 52, 73, 80, 85, 107, 66, 40, 94, 15

‫معىن الفعل و انصبته‬ ‫الناصبة‬ ‫عَلمة نصبه‬

‘Meaning of the verb combined with ‫الفعل املضارع‬ Verse
its impactor’ ‘Impactor of ‫’نصب‬ ‘Sign of ‫’نصب‬

“That you should go…” ّ ‫أن‬ ‫حذفّالنون‬ ّ ّْ‫تَ ْذ َهبُوا‬ ّ 13

186
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ
ّ ّ ّ ّ

187
‫و باهلل ال توف ت ق‬

‫‪188‬‬

Revision Guide 2018
100% (2)
Revision Guide 2018
63 pages
10 Finnish For Foreigners 1 Exercises
No ratings yet
10 Finnish For Foreigners 1 Exercises
285 pages
(Booklet) KS4 Mastery Foundation 1 - Questions
No ratings yet
(Booklet) KS4 Mastery Foundation 1 - Questions
16 pages
FOREIGN 1967 Essential - English.for - Foreign.students Book.1 256p
91% (34)
FOREIGN 1967 Essential - English.for - Foreign.students Book.1 256p
256 pages
AQA GCSE RS QUOTES - Islam and Christianity) - The Student Room
No ratings yet
AQA GCSE RS QUOTES - Islam and Christianity) - The Student Room
1 page
TOEFL Materials File
No ratings yet
TOEFL Materials File
29 pages
Unit 10 Telephoning - Lesson A
No ratings yet
Unit 10 Telephoning - Lesson A
44 pages
Academic Planning 2013-2014: Syllabus - Class I
No ratings yet
Academic Planning 2013-2014: Syllabus - Class I
24 pages
Conditionals
No ratings yet
Conditionals
55 pages
Hebrew 4 Dummies
100% (2)
Hebrew 4 Dummies
6 pages
Est Grammar en
No ratings yet
Est Grammar en
71 pages
What Is Modal Verbs and Examples
No ratings yet
What Is Modal Verbs and Examples
14 pages
Dream Textbook Nov2020
No ratings yet
Dream Textbook Nov2020
555 pages
Grammar Week 8 Future Tense
No ratings yet
Grammar Week 8 Future Tense
11 pages
56 Troublesome Word Pairs
No ratings yet
56 Troublesome Word Pairs
5 pages
Georgian Syntax
No ratings yet
Georgian Syntax
11 pages
CBSE 10 English GRAMMER&QSN
No ratings yet
CBSE 10 English GRAMMER&QSN
141 pages
Bardovi-Harlig1999 Tense Aspect Morphology Temporal Semantics PDF
No ratings yet
Bardovi-Harlig1999 Tense Aspect Morphology Temporal Semantics PDF
42 pages
Grammar Worksheet
No ratings yet
Grammar Worksheet
84 pages
Tasya's
No ratings yet
Tasya's
15 pages
Reima Al-Jarf 2015 PDF
No ratings yet
Reima Al-Jarf 2015 PDF
27 pages
Simple Past
No ratings yet
Simple Past
25 pages
SET A - TENSES OF VERB Lessons and Activities
No ratings yet
SET A - TENSES OF VERB Lessons and Activities
7 pages
Grammar Act 7 Verbal Tenses Eng 2
No ratings yet
Grammar Act 7 Verbal Tenses Eng 2
6 pages
June 2017 QP - Paper 1F Edexcel Maths (A) IGCSE
0% (1)
June 2017 QP - Paper 1F Edexcel Maths (A) IGCSE
24 pages
Verb Basic
No ratings yet
Verb Basic
6 pages
Basic Uses of English Tenses
No ratings yet
Basic Uses of English Tenses
5 pages
Stewart 7 Final
No ratings yet
Stewart 7 Final
32 pages
Khayru Tasreef Book 2 Textbook
No ratings yet
Khayru Tasreef Book 2 Textbook
108 pages
12 Tenses: Always, Usually, Often, Seldom, Never, Sometimes, Rarely, Every..
No ratings yet
12 Tenses: Always, Usually, Often, Seldom, Never, Sometimes, Rarely, Every..
2 pages
Work Book 2
No ratings yet
Work Book 2
166 pages
Physics A Level Induction OCR
100% (1)
Physics A Level Induction OCR
22 pages
Peace Corps Samoan
No ratings yet
Peace Corps Samoan
413 pages
Comparative Analysis of English and Spanish Syntactic Structures
No ratings yet
Comparative Analysis of English and Spanish Syntactic Structures
11 pages
Islamiat English PDF
No ratings yet
Islamiat English PDF
57 pages
Science Concept Cartoons Condensation PDF
No ratings yet
Science Concept Cartoons Condensation PDF
5 pages
Unit 4 - Verb Form
No ratings yet
Unit 4 - Verb Form
9 pages
Thatha and The Magic Grain
No ratings yet
Thatha and The Magic Grain
21 pages
GCSE Science (9-1) Gateway A and Twenty First Century Science B
No ratings yet
GCSE Science (9-1) Gateway A and Twenty First Century Science B
50 pages
Year 9 Biology Revision Booklet PDF
No ratings yet
Year 9 Biology Revision Booklet PDF
30 pages
(Revise Edexcel AS - A Level) Harry Smith, Steve Woolley, Steve Adams - Physics Revision Guide-Pearson Education Limited (2016)
No ratings yet
(Revise Edexcel AS - A Level) Harry Smith, Steve Woolley, Steve Adams - Physics Revision Guide-Pearson Education Limited (2016)
152 pages
GCSE Quantitative Chemistry Home Learning Sheets
No ratings yet
GCSE Quantitative Chemistry Home Learning Sheets
30 pages
All Themes RAG and Questions
No ratings yet
All Themes RAG and Questions
22 pages
Sam's A - Questions - A-Level Chem
No ratings yet
Sam's A - Questions - A-Level Chem
30 pages
Arabic Grammer For The Holy Quran
100% (2)
Arabic Grammer For The Holy Quran
45 pages
Edexcel IGCSE Biology Revision Notes
0% (1)
Edexcel IGCSE Biology Revision Notes
56 pages
Collins OCR Gateway Biology - CH2
No ratings yet
Collins OCR Gateway Biology - CH2
50 pages
June 2017 QP - C1 Edexcel
100% (1)
June 2017 QP - C1 Edexcel
28 pages
Can You Guess The Picture?
100% (1)
Can You Guess The Picture?
8 pages
AQA GCSE Chem C5 Practice Question Answers
No ratings yet
AQA GCSE Chem C5 Practice Question Answers
2 pages
As and A Level Grade Boundaries June 2023
No ratings yet
As and A Level Grade Boundaries June 2023
11 pages
Chemistry Data Booklet
No ratings yet
Chemistry Data Booklet
39 pages
Igcse Biology Year 11
No ratings yet
Igcse Biology Year 11
11 pages
A Level Chemistry Edexcel Sample Chapter
No ratings yet
A Level Chemistry Edexcel Sample Chapter
38 pages
AQA Chem GCSE Combined C6 Practice Answers
No ratings yet
AQA Chem GCSE Combined C6 Practice Answers
2 pages
Complete Notes
No ratings yet
Complete Notes
7 pages
Geography Revision! For Y7 and Y8 by Sophie Charlesworth
No ratings yet
Geography Revision! For Y7 and Y8 by Sophie Charlesworth
7 pages
Hall Probe
100% (2)
Hall Probe
2 pages
Year 7 Science Task 3 Answers To Textbook Questions
No ratings yet
Year 7 Science Task 3 Answers To Textbook Questions
4 pages
AQA GCSE Biology Answers
No ratings yet
AQA GCSE Biology Answers
114 pages
Rules For Biological Drawings
No ratings yet
Rules For Biological Drawings
1 page
GCSE Chemistry Higher Tier Topic Test 1
100% (1)
GCSE Chemistry Higher Tier Topic Test 1
59 pages
GRADE 10 PHYSICS-Fluid-Mechanics-Final
No ratings yet
GRADE 10 PHYSICS-Fluid-Mechanics-Final
23 pages
O Levels Arabic Question Paper 1
No ratings yet
O Levels Arabic Question Paper 1
16 pages
2 H
No ratings yet
2 H
22 pages
English Grammar
No ratings yet
English Grammar
2 pages
Year 10 PDHPE - Unit 1 EWorkbook
No ratings yet
Year 10 PDHPE - Unit 1 EWorkbook
49 pages
Periodic Table Handout Edexcel IGCSE Chemistry November 2024
No ratings yet
Periodic Table Handout Edexcel IGCSE Chemistry November 2024
2 pages
GCSE Religious Studies Quotes Revision List
No ratings yet
GCSE Religious Studies Quotes Revision List
1 page
Year 6 Sat Booklet 3
No ratings yet
Year 6 Sat Booklet 3
18 pages
Reconnect With The Qur'an
No ratings yet
Reconnect With The Qur'an
57 pages
C9 Crude Oil and Fuels Student Book Answers
No ratings yet
C9 Crude Oil and Fuels Student Book Answers
4 pages
Alleyns 11 English Sample Paper 3
No ratings yet
Alleyns 11 English Sample Paper 3
12 pages
Y12 OCR A Level Chemistry Keywords
No ratings yet
Y12 OCR A Level Chemistry Keywords
4 pages
Topic 1 AS Physical Quantities and Units
No ratings yet
Topic 1 AS Physical Quantities and Units
28 pages
AQA GCSE Maths Predicted Paper 1H MathMantis
No ratings yet
AQA GCSE Maths Predicted Paper 1H MathMantis
23 pages
How To Write A Good Answer To Exam Essay Questions - 13 Steps
No ratings yet
How To Write A Good Answer To Exam Essay Questions - 13 Steps
5 pages
Quran Color Transliteration Translation Tajwid Surah 55 Ar Rahman PDF
No ratings yet
Quran Color Transliteration Translation Tajwid Surah 55 Ar Rahman PDF
4 pages
OCR GCSE 9-1 GATEWAY SCIENCE BIOLOGY A J247 Specification
No ratings yet
OCR GCSE 9-1 GATEWAY SCIENCE BIOLOGY A J247 Specification
82 pages
QuranicArabicLevel1updated 1
No ratings yet
QuranicArabicLevel1updated 1
31 pages
Academic Centre List Private Candidates
No ratings yet
Academic Centre List Private Candidates
35 pages
Revision Sheets For AQA Chemistry
No ratings yet
Revision Sheets For AQA Chemistry
12 pages
978-0-00-814770-9 Collins International Primary English Workbooks - Workbook 4-1
No ratings yet
978-0-00-814770-9 Collins International Primary English Workbooks - Workbook 4-1
9 pages
Islamiyat IGCSE 0493 Pathway Learning Journey 2024-2025
No ratings yet
Islamiyat IGCSE 0493 Pathway Learning Journey 2024-2025
6 pages
Tenses Rules Charts, Examples, Types (PDF Available) Leverage Edu
No ratings yet
Tenses Rules Charts, Examples, Types (PDF Available) Leverage Edu
1 page
Science Workbook Year7
No ratings yet
Science Workbook Year7
153 pages
English P1 Worksheets
No ratings yet
English P1 Worksheets
5 pages
Year 7 Practice PTM
No ratings yet
Year 7 Practice PTM
32 pages
AQA GCSE 91 Biology Full Download
100% (1)
AQA GCSE 91 Biology Full Download
405 pages
Sibawaihi: Transformational grammar
From Everand
Sibawaihi: Transformational grammar
El Mouatamid Ben Rochd
No ratings yet